--- /dev/null
+%
+% GCHORDS, a LaTeX2e package to draw guitar chord diagrams.
+%
+% version 1.3.1 by K.Peeters, t16@nikhef.nl
+%
+% See ChangeLog for a list of changes.
+%
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Variable, user definable stuff is below.
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{gchords}
+
+
+% Your guitar
+\newcommand\strings{6} % number of strings on your guitar
+\newcommand\numfrets{5} % length (no of frets) of a diagram
+
+% These should be modified if you want chords in a different size
+\newcommand\mediumchords{
+\def\gchordsize{3.0mm} % distance between two frets (and two strings)
+\font\fingerfont=cmr5 % font used for numbering fingers
+\font\namefont=cmr10 % font used for labeling of the chord
+\font\fretposfont=cmr7 % font used for the fret position marker
+\def\dampsymbol{$\scriptstyle\times$} % symbol of the `damp this string' marker
+}
+\newcommand\smallchords{
+\def\gchordsize{2.0mm} % distance between two frets (and two strings)
+\font\fingerfont=cmr5 % font used for numbering fingers
+\font\namefont=cmr10 % font used for labeling of the chord
+\font\fretposfont=cmr7 % font used for the fret position marker
+\def\dampsymbol{$\scriptstyle\times$} % symbol of the `damp this string' marker
+}
+
+\smallchords
+
+% Dotsizes (which scale with the chordsize macro)
+\newcommand\fatsiz{1.6} % size of a fat note
+\newcommand\normalsiz{1.2} % size of a normal note
+\newcommand\fingsiz{1.4} % size of the circle around a numbered finger
+\newcommand\fatfingsiz{1.8} % size of the circle around a numbered finger
+
+% Position of the chord in its bounding box
+\newcommand\xoff{2} % pos(\xoff,\yoff) is left lower corner of diagram
+\newcommand\yoff{2}
+
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand\basenote{\circle*{\fatsiz}}
+\newcommand\stdnote{\circle*{\normalsiz}}
+\newcommand\fingnote{\circle{\fingsiz}}
+\newcommand\fatfingnote{\circle{\fatfingsiz}}
+\newcommand\cvline{\line(0,1)}
+\newcommand\chline{\line(1,0)}
+
+\newcommand\gchords[1]{$$\hbox{#1}$$}
+\newcommand\chtext[1]{\vbox{\settowidth{\hsize}{#1 xxxx} {#1
+ \newdimen\ascale\ascale=\gchordsize\vskip8\ascale}}}
+
+% #1 modifiers (like num, or fretbar0)
+% #2 positions
+% #3 chordname
+
+\newcount\truewidth % the true width of the diagram, computed from strings
+\newcount\topline
+\newcount\myvpos
+\newcount\mylength
+\newcount\fnum % current f{...} value (number of finger)
+\newcount\fpos % current p{...} value
+\newcount\ghor % string number currently being drawn
+\newcount\prevpos % previous value of p{...}, zero if no previous dot on string
+\newcount\dlen % length of the vertical line to draw between dots
+\newcount\cpos % scratch variable to hold vertical position of dot
+\newcount\stpos
+\newdimen\needsize
+
+\newcommand\gchord[3]{\vbox{\hbox{\newdimen\ascale\ascale=\gchordsize
+\truewidth=\strings\advance\truewidth by -1
+\advance\truewidth by \xoff
+\topline=\numfrets
+\advance\topline by \yoff
+\advance\topline by 2
+
+%%% The Diagram itself %%%%%%%%%
+\unitlength\ascale
+\begin{picture}(\truewidth,\topline)
+\advance\topline by -1
+\advance\truewidth by -\xoff
+\myvpos=\yoff\advance\myvpos by \numfrets
+%%% Parse the modifier string %%
+\newcommand\topbar{n}
+\@tfor\modstr:=#1\do
+ { \if\modstr t{\thicklines\put(\xoff,\myvpos){\chline{\truewidth}}\thinlines}
+ \else {\advance\topline by -2
+ \put(\xoff,\topline){\hbox to 0pt{\hss\fretposfont\modstr\ }}
+ }
+ \fi
+ }
+
+%%% Horizontal lines (frets)%%%%
+\mylength=0
+\myvpos=\yoff
+\advance\myvpos by 1 % first fret starts a bit higher
+\@whilenum \mylength<\numfrets \do {
+ \put(\xoff,\myvpos){\chline{\truewidth}}
+ \advance\mylength by 1
+ \advance\myvpos by 1}
+
+%%% The Dots %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand\fnow{n}
+\newcommand\pnow{n}
+\newcommand\snow{n}
+
+\putdots{#2}{\gchordsize}
+\put(\xoff,0){\hbox to \truewidth\ascale{\hss\namefont #3\hss}}
+\end{picture}
+}}}
+
+%\newcommand{\putdots}[2]{\@tfor\thisele:=#1\do{\if\thisele {}{hi}
+% \else\if\thisele p{}
+% \else.\thisele{}\fi\fi}}
+
+\long\def\ReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+ \def\f@rc#1#2#3{%
+ \def\temp@ty{#2}%
+ \ifx\@empty\temp@ty
+ \else
+ \ReturnAfterFi{%
+ \f@@rc#1#2\f@@rc{#3}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+
+\def\@forc#1#2#3{\expandafter\f@rc\expandafter#1{#2 K}{#3}}
+%\def\f@rc#1#2#3{\def\temp@ty{#2}\ifx\@empty\temp@ty\else
+% \f@@rc#1#2\f@@rc{#3}\fi}
+\def\f@@rc#1#2#3\f@@rc#4{\def#1{#2}#4\f@rc#1{#3}{#4}}
+
+%\newcommand{\putdots}[2]{\@tfor\thisel:=#1K\do{\message{(\thisel)}\ifx\thisel{}\else\if\thisel K{SHIT}\else\ifx\thisel p{}\else.\thisel{}\fi\fi\fi}}
+
+\newcommand{\putdots}[2]{
+ \prevpos=0
+ \fpos=0
+ \ghor=\xoff
+ \let\curnote\stdnote
+ \let\curfing\fingnote
+ \def\Ktest{K}\def\cotest{,}\def\btest{b}\def\ftest{f}
+ \def\stest{s}\def\ptest{p}\def\xtest{x}\def\ntest{n}
+ \@forc\thisel{#1}{
+ \ifx\thisel\Ktest{}\else
+ \ifx\thisel\cotest\cpos=-\fpos\advance\cpos by \numfrets\advance\cpos by \yoff
+ \ifnum\cpos > \yoff
+ \dlen=\cpos
+ \advance\dlen by -\yoff
+ \put(\ghor,\yoff){\cvline{\dlen}}
+ \fi
+ \prevpos=0
+ \fpos=0
+ \fnum=0
+ \renewcommand\pnow{n}
+ \renewcommand\fnow{n}
+ \renewcommand\snow{n}
+ \advance\ghor by 1
+ \else\ifx\thisel\btest\let\curnote\basenote
+ \let\curfing\fatfingnote
+ \else\ifx\thisel\ftest\renewcommand\snow{n}\renewcommand\pnow{n}\renewcommand\fnow{y}
+ \else\ifx\thisel\stest\renewcommand\snow{y}\renewcommand\pnow{n}\renewcommand\fnow{n}
+ \else\ifx\thisel\ptest\renewcommand\snow{n}\renewcommand\pnow{y}\renewcommand\fnow{n}
+ \else\ifx\thisel\xtest{\put(\ghor,\yoff){\cvline{\numfrets}}
+ \needsize=\ascale
+ \divide\needsize by 2
+ \unitlength\needsize
+ \multiply\ghor by 2
+ \multiply\topline by 2
+ \advance\topline by -1
+ \put(\ghor,\topline){\hbox to 0pt{\hss{\dampsymbol}\hss}}
+ }
+ \else\ifx\thisel\ntest\put(\ghor,\yoff){\cvline{\numfrets}}
+ \else
+ \if\fnow y \fnum=\thisel
+ \else\if\snow y \ghor=\thisel\advance\ghor by \xoff
+ \advance\ghor by -1
+ \else
+ \prevpos=\fpos\advance\prevpos by -1
+ \fpos=\thisel
+ \ifnum\fnum > 0
+ \cpos=\fpos\advance\cpos by -1
+ \ifnum\cpos > \prevpos
+ \dlen=\fpos\advance\dlen by -\prevpos
+ \advance\dlen by -1
+ \stpos=\topline\advance\stpos by -\fpos
+ \put(\ghor,\stpos){\cvline{\dlen}}
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \put(\ghor,\yoff){\cvline{\numfrets}}
+ \fi
+ \cpos=-\fpos\advance\cpos by \numfrets\advance\cpos by \yoff
+ {
+ \needsize=\ascale
+ \divide\needsize by 2
+ \unitlength\needsize
+ \multiply\ghor by 2
+ \multiply\cpos by 2
+ \advance\cpos by 1
+ \ifnum\fnum > 0
+ \put(\ghor,\cpos){\curfing}
+ \put(\ghor,\cpos){$\vcenter{\vskip 0.5em\vbox{\hbox to 0pt{\hss{\fingerfont\number\fnum}\hss}}}$}
+ \else
+ \put(\ghor,\cpos){\curnote}
+ \fi
+ }
+ \let\curnote\stdnote
+ \let\curfing\fingnote
+ \fi\fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ }
+}
+
+\makeatother
+
+% That's all folks!
+%-------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- /dev/null
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+\f
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+\f
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+\f
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+\f
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
--- /dev/null
+To install GuitarTeX do the following:
+
+
+1) make sure that LaTeX, Perl and Perl/TK are installed
+ (see Section Requirements in the manual)
+
+2) unpack the guitartex archive
+ (for example in your home directory)
+
+
+3) cd to the guitartex-x.x directory
+
+
+4) run the following commands:
+
+ make conf (as normal user, this overwrites an existing config file!)
+ after this you will find the config file in ~/.guitartexrc
+
+ make install (as root)
+
+5) you may now delete the guitartex-x.x directory
--- /dev/null
+conf:
+ cp --force guitartex.conf ${HOME}/.guitartexrc
+ cp --recursive --force .TeX ${HOME}
+
+install:
+ cp --force gtx2tex.pl /usr/local/bin/gtx2tex
+ cp --force guitartex.pl /usr/local/bin/guitartex
+ mkdir -p /usr/local/lib/guitartex
+ cp --recursive --force * /usr/local/lib/guitartex
+ chmod a+x /usr/local/bin/gtx2tex
+ chmod a+x /usr/local/bin/guitartex
+
+
+uninstall:
+ rm /usr/local/bin/guitartex /usr/local/bin/gtx2tex
+ rm -r /usr/local/lib/guitartex
+
--- /dev/null
+html:
+ db2html guitartex.xml
--- /dev/null
+<appendix>
+ <title>Dank und Anerkennung</title>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <title>Danke an ...</title>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Lucio F. Albenga</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Spanien für seine spanische Übersetzung
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>David Cuny</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Kanada für seine Hilfe bei der Erstellung der ersten Version
+ dieser Dokumentation</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Brian Ewins</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Schottland für sein Programm PStab und den Manual
+ Song</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Bernhard Gröne</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Deutschland, der mir sein Programm Liederbuchgenerator
+ zur Verfügung gestellt hat
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Christoph Lange</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Deutschland für seine FindBin-Ergänzung
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Gary Lawrence Murphy</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Kanada für seine Tipps und die Tests von mehreren Versionen
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Pawel Pastula</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Polen für seine polnische Übersetzung
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Kasper Peeters</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus England für das LaTeX-Paket gchords
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Marcelo Pereira</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Brasilien für seine Übersetzung
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Daniele Pighin</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Italien für viele Vorschläge und seine Übersetzung
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Dan Polansky</term>
+ <listitem><para>aus Tschechien für sein Programm ChordPack
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>den Leuten von Sourceforge.net und Freshmeat.net</term>
+ <listitem><para>für ihre großartigen Opensource-Server</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>allen Leuten der Opensource-Familie</term>
+ <listitem><para>die Linux, KDE, LaTeX, MusixTeX,Perl und viele andere Programme
+ entwickelt haben, auf denen GuitarTeX basiert</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ &sflogo;
+</appendix>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="directives">
+ <title>Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</title>
+ <para>
+ Direktiven sind Befehle zwischen geschweiften Klammern, die das Aussehen
+ der erzeugten Ausgabe steuern. Einige häufig benötigte Direktiven können
+ durch eine Abkürzung ersetzt werden (siehe Beispiele). GuitarTeX
+ bringt einige neue Direktiven mit, die das original Chord Programm nicht kennt.
+ </para>
+
+ <section id="specialchar">
+ <title>Spezielle Zeichen</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Einige Zeichen haben in GuitarTeX eine besondere Bedeutung:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para># am Anfang einer Zeile markiert einen Kommentar.
+ Die Zeile wird von GuitarTeX ignoriert</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>/ darf nur in Akkorden mit Bass verwendet werden
+ (z.B. A/E)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="geometry">
+ <title>Seitenlayout</title>
+ <para>
+ Die Direktive geometry bietet flexible Möglichkeiten, das Layout einer Seite
+ anzupassen. Sie benutzt das LaTeX-Paket geometry. Die folgende Beschreibung
+ ist ein (modifizierter) Teil der Original-Dokumentation.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ Das geometry Paket bietet viele automatische Ausrichtungen, so dass
+ nur wenige manuelle Angaben zum Seitenlayout erforderlich sind.
+ In diesem Fall reicht ein einfaches
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:a4paper}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Das Setzen von Seitenrändern erfolgt mit
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:margin=2.5cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ wenn alle Ränder einer Seite 2,5 Zentimeter betragen sollen.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ Längenangaben erfolgen in
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>Zentimeter (cm)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Millimeter (mm)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Inch (in)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Punkt (pt)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Seitenlayout</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Das Seitenlayout besteht aus einer einfachen Struktur:
+ Die Seite (paper) enthält einen Textkörper (total-body, druckbarer Bereich) und Ränder.
+ Der Textkörper besteht aus Kopf- und Fußzeile, dem eigentlichen Text und
+ (optional) den Randbemerkungen. Die vier Ränder heißen left-margin, right-margin,
+ top-margin und bottom-margin.
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>paper: total-body (printable area) and margins
+total-body: head, body(text area), foot and marginal notes
+margins: left-, right-, top- and bottom-margin</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Jeder Rand wird von der jeweiligen Kante der Seite aus gemessen,
+ z.B. left-margin meint den Abstand zwischen linker Seitenkante und
+ dem Textkörper. Die Größen von paper, totalbody und
+ margins stehen in diesen Ralationen:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>paperwidth = left + width + right
+paperheight = top + height + bottom</programlisting>
+ </section> <!--Layout Dimensions-->
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Optionen</title>
+
+ <table>
+ <title>Optionen der Direktive <command>geometry</command></title>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>landscape</entry>
+ <entry>schaltet um auf Querformat</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>portrait</entry>
+ <entry>schaltet um auf Hochformat</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>twoside</entry>
+ <entry>schaltet auf zweiseitige Ausgabe um. Die linken und rechen Ränder
+ werden bei geraden und ungeraden Seiten symetrisch angeordnet.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>reversemp</entry>
+ <entry>Randbemerkungen erscheinen am linken Rand (statt am rechten Rand)</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>nohead</entry>
+ <entry>keine Reservierung von Platz für Kopfzeilen</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>nofoot</entry>
+ <entry>keine Reservierung von Platz für Fußzeilen</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>noheadfoot</entry>
+ <entry>keine Reservierung von Platz für Kopf- und Fußzeilen</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>a4paper, a5paper,letterpaper, legalpaper</entry>
+ <entry>spezifizert die Papiergröße. Ohne Wert anzugeben.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>paperwidth</entry>
+ <entry>Breite des Papiers. paperwidth=<paperwidth></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>paperheight</entry>
+ <entry>Höhe des Papiers. paperheight=<paperheight></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>width</entry>
+ <entry>Breite des Textkörpers. width=<width>or
+ totalwidth=<width>.
+ Diese Angabe sollte nicht mit der Textbreite (textwidth) verwechselt werden.
+ width enthält die Textbreite und die Breite der Randbemerkungen.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>height</entry>
+ <entry>Höhe des Textkörpers (einschließlich Kopf- und Fußzeile).
+ height=<height></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>left</entry>
+ <entry>linker Rand. left=<leftmargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>right</entry>
+ <entry>rechter Rand. right=<rightmargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>top</entry>
+ <entry>oberer Rand. top=<topmargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>bottom</entry>
+ <entry>unterer Rand. bottom=<bottommargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>margin</entry>
+ <entry>alle Ränder. margin=<margin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>textwidth</entry>
+ <entry>Breite des Textes. textwidth=<width></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>textheight</entry>
+ <entry>Höhe des Textes. textheight=<height></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>marginpar</entry>
+ <entry>Breite der Randbemerkungen. marginpar=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>marginparsep</entry>
+ <entry>Abstand zwischen Text und Randbemerkungen. marginparsep=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>head</entry>
+ <entry>Höhe der Kopfzeile. head=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>headsep</entry>
+ <entry>Abstand zwischen Kopfzeile und Text. headsep=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>foot</entry>
+ <entry>Abstand zwischen Fußzeile und Text. foot=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Beispiele</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Setzen Sie die Höhe des Textkörpers auf 10in, den unteren Rand auf 2cm.
+ Der obere Rand wird automatisch berechnet:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:height=10in,bottom=2cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>oder</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{g:height=10in,bottom=2cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>oder</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:height=10in}
+{g:bottom:=2cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Setzen Sie den linken, rechten und oberen Rand auf 3cm, 2cm und 2.5in.
+ Es wird keine Kopfzeile benötige.
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:left=3cm,right=2cm, nohead,
+ top=2.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>oder</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:left=3cm}
+{geometry:right=2cm}
+{geometry:nohead}
+{geometry:top=2.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>oder</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{g:left=3cm,right=2cm}
+{g:nohead, top=2.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>und so weiter ...</para>
+
+ <para>
+ Ändern Sie die Breite der Randbemerkungen auf 3cm
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:marginpar=3cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:marginpar=3cm, reversemp}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>lässt die Randbemerkungen am linken Rand ausgeben.</para>
+
+ <para>Verwenden sie A5-Papier im Querformat:</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:a5paper, landscape}</programlisting>
+
+ </section>
+ </section> <!--Page Layout-->
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Dokumentstrukur</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>title</title>
+ <para>
+ Der Titell eines Stückes wird durch die Direktive
+ <command>title</command> markiert.
+ Der Titel wird zentriert mit einer vergrößerten Schrift ausgegeben.
+ In Dokumenten mit mehreren Stücken verursacht <command>title</command>
+ einen Seitenumbruch.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>title</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{title:Go Down Moses}
+{t:Go Down Moses}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>subtitle</title>
+ <para>
+ Die Direktive <command>subtitle</command> dient zur Darstellung zusätzlicher
+ Informationen, wie z.B. Interpret oder Komponist.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>subtitle</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{subtitle:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}
+{st:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>sob, eob</title>
+ <para>
+ Eine Bridge wird mit <command>sob</command> (start of bridge) am Anfang,
+ und <command>eob</command> (end of bridge) am Ende markiert. Die Bridge
+ wird auf Farbdruckern in blau ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit der Direktive
+ <command>color_bridge</command> angepasst werden (siehe <xref linkend="color"/>).
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>sob</command>, <command>eob</command>
+ (aus Here, There And Everywhere, Beatles):</title>
+ <programlisting>{sob}
+I want her [Ab]everywhere [Fm]
+And if [Bbm]she's beside me [C^7]I know I need [Fm]never care
+[Bb]But to love her [C^7]is to meet her
+{eob}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>soc, eoc</title>
+ <para>
+ Ein Refrain wird mit <command>soc</command> (start of chorus) am Anfang und
+ mit <command>eoc</command> (end of chorus) am Ende markiert. Der Refrain
+ wird auf Farbdruckern in rot ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit der Direktive
+ <command>color_chorus</command> angepasst werden (siehe <xref linkend="color"/>).
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>soc</command>, <command>eoc</command>
+ (aus With A Litle Help From My Friends, Beatles):</title>
+ <programlisting>{soc}
+Oh, I get [C]by with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Mm, I get [C]high with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Oh, I'm gonna [C]try with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+{eoc}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>soi, eoi</title>
+ <para>
+ Ein Instrumantal-Teil wird mit <command>soi</command> (start of
+ instrumental) am Anfang und <command>eoi</command> (end of instrumental)
+ am Ende markiert. Der Instrumental-Teil wird auf Farbdruckern in grau
+ ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit der Direktive <command>color_instr</command>
+ angepasst werden (siehe <xref linkend="color"/>).
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>np</title>
+ <para><command>np</command> steht für "neue Seite" und erzeugt einen Seitenumbruch.</para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>np</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{np}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>sot, eot</title>
+ <para>
+ Tabulaturen werden mit <command>sot</command> (start of tablature) am Anfang
+ und <command>eot</command> (end of tablature) am Ende markiert.
+ Tabulaturen werden auf Farbdruckern in grün ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit
+ der Direktive <command>color_tab directive</command> angepasst werden
+ (siehe <xref linkend="color"/>).
+ Tabulaturen werden in einer nichtproportionalen Schriftart ausgegeben.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>sot</command>, <command>eot</command>
+ (aus Pretty Woman, Roy Orbison):</title>
+ <programlisting>{sot}
+E ---------------------|------------------------------------
+B ---------------------|------------------------------------
+G ---------------------|------------------------------------
+D -----------------0---|-------------------0---4---2---0----
+A -------------2-------|---------------2--------------------
+E -0---0---4-----------|---0---0---4------------------------
+{eot}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ Wenn Sie ASCII-Tabulaturen nicht mögen, bietet GuitarTeX Ihnen eine
+ andere Möglichkeit in <xref linkend="tablature"/>.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ </section> <!--Document structure-->
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Fonts</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Die Direktiven zur Beeinflussung der Schriftart und -farbe können irgendwo
+ in Ihrer Datei stehen. Trotzdem ist es hilfreich sie am Anfang zu platzieren.
+ Die angegebenen Werte gelten für das ganze Dokument.
+ </para>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>font_size</title>
+ <para>
+ LaTeX kennt drei Schriftgrößen 10pt, 11pt and 12pt. GuitarTeX nutzt normalerweise
+ 11pt (Titel und Untertitel werden automatisch vergrößert). Wenn Sie z.B. 12pt
+ verwenden wollen, schreiben Sie:
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>font_size</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{font_size:12}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>Achtung: schreiben Sie nicht 12pt statt 12!</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="color">
+ <title>color_xxx</title>
+ <para>
+ Mit den folgenden Direktiven können Sie die Textfarbe für Refrain, Bridge,
+ Instrumental-Teil Tabulaturen und zweite Stimme anpassen. Für die zweite Stimme
+ können Sie auch die Hintergrundfarbe ändern, so dass Sie z.B. weiße
+ Schrift auf einem farbigen Hintergrund verwenden können. Das erleichtert
+ den Sängern hoffentlich die Orientierung bei mehreren Textzeilen :-)
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Die Direktiven heißen</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>color_chorus</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_bridge</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_instr</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_tab</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_second</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_second_back</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ Als Parameter wird eine durch Kommas getrennte Liste von Werten zwischen
+ null und eins, die die Farben rot, grün und blau repräsentieren.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>color_chorus</command> (Refrain in hellblau):</title>
+ <programlisting>{color_chorus:.5,.5,1}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="songbook">
+ <title>Ein Liederbuch (Songbook) erstellen</title>
+ <para>
+ Die Direktiven document_class und book_... können irgendwo im Dokument
+ platziert werden.
+ </para>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>document_class</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Die Direktive document_class legt fest, welche Art Dokument Sie erhalten.
+ Es gibt zwei mögliche Werte:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>book</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>article (Voreinstellung)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>document_class</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{document_class:book}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>Der Wert "book" erzeugt</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>eine Titelseite</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>ein Inhaltsverzeichnis</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Kopfzeilen mit Seitennummern</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>einen Index</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>book_title, book_author, book_date</title>
+
+ <para>Diese drei Direktiven beschreiben den Inhalt der Titelseite.</para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>book_title</command>,
+ <command>book_author</command>, <command>book_date</command>
+ </title>
+ <programlisting>{book_title:My Favourite Songs}
+{book_author:My Name}
+{book_date:September 2000}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ Der Wert in book_title erscheint in den Kopfzeilen auf geraden Seiten.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>chapter</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Wenn sie ein Songbook erstellen, können Sie das Dokument mit der Direktive chapter
+ in Kapitel einteilen. Im Dokument erscheint eine Titelseite für jedes neue Kapitel.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>chapter</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{chapter:Beatles}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ Der Name des Kapitels erscheint im Inhaltsverzeichnis und in den
+ Kopfzeilen auf ungeraden Seiten.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="include">
+ <title>include</title>
+ <para>
+ Wenn Sie aus einer Sammlung von Chord-Dateien ein Songbook erstellen wollen
+ brauchen Sie diese nicht alle zu einer Datei zusammen zu fassen. Das hat
+ nämlich einige Nachteile, z.B. dass Sie einen einzelnen Song nicht mehr
+ transponieren können. Mit der Direktive include können Sie die Dateien einzeln
+ speichern. Erstellen Sie lediglich eine Songbook-Datei und binden die
+ einzelnen Stücke mit include ein.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>include</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{document_class:book}
+{book_title:}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 1}
+{include:song file 1}
+{include:song file 2}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 2}
+{include:song file 3}
+{include:song file 4}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>In diesem Beispiel wurde ein Songbook mit vier Stücken in zwei Kapiteln
+ erstellt.</para>
+
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>even</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Die Direktive <command>even</command> lässt ein neues Stück in einem Songbook
+ auf der linken Seite beginnen. Das ist hilfreich, wenn das Stück länger als eine Seite ist,
+ damit man nicht umblättern muss.
+ Die Direktive muss vor der Direktive title eines neuen Stückes angeordnet sein.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>even</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{even}
+{title:Proud Mary}
+{st:Creedence Clearwater Revival 1972}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="tablature">
+ <title>Gitarren- und Bass-Tabulaturen</title>
+
+ <para>GuitarTeX kennt zwei neue Direktiven zur Darstellung von Tabulaturen:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>{guitartab: } für Gitarren-Tabulaturen</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>{basstab: } für Bass-Tabulaturen</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ Jede guitartab oder basstab Direktive stellt eine Zeile mit sechs bzw vier Linien dar.
+ Sie können mit {guitartab: } oder {basstab: } auch leere Tabulaturen erzeugen.
+ Setzen Sie eine Leerzeile vor die Direktive, damit die Tabulatur am linken Rand beginnt.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Die Klammern können enthalten:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>normaler Text, der unterhalb der Tabulatur ausgegeben wird</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Noten im Format [string;fret], z.B. [2;5] für 5. Bund auf der A-Saite</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Taktstriche (durch das Zeichen | dargestellt)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Zusätzlicher Leerraum mit "_"</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+
+ <figure id="fig:tablature">
+ <title>Tabulatur Schaltflächen</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/tablature.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ Anstatt die Zeilen von Hand einzugeben können Sie die Schaltfächen verwenden
+ (see <xref linkend="fig:tablature"/>).
+ Ein Klick auf die Schaltfläche "Gitarre" oder "Bass" fügt die jeweilige Direktive
+ an der aktuellen Cursorposition ein. Um eine Note einzufügen, geben Sie die Nummer
+ des Bundes in das Eingabefeld ein und klicken die gewünschte Saite an. Die Note
+ wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt.
+ Danach steht der Cursor wieder im Eingabefeld, so dass Sie nacheinander beliebig
+ viele Noten erfassen können.
+ </para>
+<section>
+
+<title>Beispiele</title>
+
+<example>
+<title>Leere Gitarren-Tabulatur</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat1.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tabulatur-Beispiel</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Eine Bass-Tabulatur mit Text</title>
+<programlisting>{basstab:some text}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat2.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tabulatur-Beispiel</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Noten, Taktstriche und Leerraum</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:[2;3][3;0][3;2][3;3]|[4;0]__[4;2]__[5;0]__[5;1]|}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat3.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tabulatur-Beispiel</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Text unter den Noten anordnen</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:[2;3]do [3;0]re [3;2]mi [3;3]fa |[4;0]so [4;2]la [5;0]si [5;1]do|}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat4.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tabulatur-Beispiel</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Eine einfache Bass-Tabulatur</title>
+<programlisting>{basstab:[2;5][2;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;7][3;7]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5]}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat5.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tabulatur-Beispiel</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Akkorde</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:[2;3]&[3;5]&[4;5]C (power chord) |[2;3]&[3;2]&[4;0]&[5;1]C chord}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat6.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tabulatur-Beispiel</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+
+</section>
+
+ </section> <!--Tablature-->
+
+ <section id="others">
+ <title>Andere</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>define</title>
+ <para>
+ Mit der Direktive define können Sie ein Akkord-Symbol am Ende eines Stückes
+ erstellen. Die Direktive kann irgendwo im Stück platziert sein.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>define verfügt über acht Parameter:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>den Akkordnamen</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>die Nummer des ersten Bundes</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>sechs Nummern für die sechs Saiten (ein x bedeutet, dass die Saite nicht gespielt wird)
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>define</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{define:A 1 x 0 2 2 2 0}
+{define:Cm 3 x 1 3 3 2 1}
+{define:Gm/Bb 4 3 2 2 1 x x}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>Das Ergebnis sieht so aus wie in <xref linkend="fig:chord"/>.</para>
+
+ <figure id="fig:chord">
+ <title>Akkord-Symbole</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/chord-example.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>comment</title>
+ <para>Die Direktive comment fügt einen Text ein, der nicht zum eigentlichen
+ Stück gehört.</para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>comment</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{comment: repeat chorus}
+{c: repeat chorus}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>margin</title>
+ <para>
+ Die Direktive margin erzeugt eine Randbemerkung. Diese können z.B. dazu genutzt
+ werden, Hinweise für den Musiker einzufügen.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>margin</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{margin:Fade Out}
+{m:Fade Out}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>second</title>
+ <para>
+ In einigen Stücken hat die zweite Stimme nicht nur eine andere Melodie,
+ sondern auch einen anderen oder versetzt gesungenen Text.
+ Bekannte Beispiele sind "California Dreaming" von The Mamas And The Papas und
+ "Help" von den Beatles. Wenn Sie die zweite Stimme mit der Direktive second
+ markieren erscheint sie in weißer Schrift auf grauem Hintergrund.
+ Wegen der proportionalen Schrift müssen Sie ein wenig experimentieren, um die
+ korrekte Ausrichtung zwischen erster und zweiter Stimme zu erhalten.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Direktive <command>second</command> (aus Help!, The
+ Beatles)</title>
+ <programlisting>[G] When I was younger so much [Hm]younger than today
+{second:When when I was young}
+[Em] I never needed anybody's [C]help in [F]any [G]way
+{second:I never need help in any way}
+[G]But now these days are gone and I'm [Bm]not so self assured
+{second:Now these days are gone}
+[Em] Now I find I've changed my mind,
+{second:And now I find}
+I've [C]opened [F]up the [G]doors
+{second:I've opened up the doors}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+ </section> <!--Others-->
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="editor">
+ <title>Der Editor GuitarTeX</title>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Starten</title>
+
+ <para>Um den Editor GuitarTeX zu starten, öffen Sie eine Shell und geben
+ das Kommando <command>guitartex</command> ein.</para>
+
+ </sect1> <!--Starting-->
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Menüs</title>
+ <para>
+ Sie können jedes Menü "abreißen", indem Sie auf den ersten Eintrag (-----) klicken.
+ Das kann sehr nützlich sein, wenn Sie einen Befehl mehrmals benutzen wollen.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="filemenu">
+ <title>Menü Datei</title>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Neu, Öffnen, Speichern, Speichern als, Beenden</title>
+ <para>
+ Die Menüpunkte Neu, Öffnen, Speichern, Speichern als, Beenden
+ verhalten sich, wie Sie es von anderen Anwendungen mit grafischer Oberfläche
+ gewohnt sind. Daher wird hier auf eine weitere Beschreibung verzichtet.
+ Alternativ können Sie auf eine der Schaltflächen klicken.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Export > LaTeX , Export > Postscript, Export > PDF</title>
+ <para>
+ Die geöffnete Datei wird gespeichert und dann in das LaTeX-, Postscript-
+ bzw. PDF-Format konvertiert. Der Name der erzeugten Datei entspricht dem
+ ursprünglichen Namen mit der Erweiterung .tex, .ps bzw. .pdf.
+ Alternativ können Sie auf eine der Schaltflächen klicken.
+
+ <figure id="fig:exporticons">
+ <title>Schaltflächen für die Ausgabe im LaTeX-, Postscript oder PDF-Format</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/latex.png"/>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/postscript.png"/>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/pdf.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ Nachdem die exportierte Datei erstellt wurde, startet ein Programm zu deren
+ Anzeige. Sie können das gewünschte Anzeigeprogramm auswählen, indem Sie
+ die Parameter <command>$text_viewer</command>, <command>$ps_viewer</command>
+ und <command>$pdf_viewer</command> in der Konfigurationsdatei ändern
+ (siehe <xref linkend="configfile"/>).
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Menü Bearbeiten</title>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen</title>
+ <para>
+ Wenn Sie Text ausschneiden, kopieren und einfügen möchten, benutzen Sie
+ die Tastenkombinationen strg-x (ausschneiden), strg-c (kopieren) und strg-v
+ (einfügen).
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Datei einfügen</title>
+ <para>
+ Der Befehl startet einen Dateiauswahldialog. Die ausgewählte Datei wird
+ an der Cursorposition eingefügt.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="crd2chopro">
+ <title>crd -> chopro</title>
+ <para>
+ Sie werden häufig Musikstücke mit Akkorden in rohem ASCII-Format finden.
+ Diese sehen im Gegensatz zum Chord-Format so aus:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>D A7 D
+I print verses in a row,
+ A7 D
+The next line gets put down below,
+ A7 D G G# A
+Mumble mumble rhymes with grow
+ A7susx
+Done this verse, now we go!</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Setzen Sie den Cursor in die erste Zeile (die mit den Akkorden) und
+ rufen den Menüpunkt crd->chopro auf oder drücken Sie die Funktionstaste F).
+ Die Akkordzeile und die folgende Textzeile werden zu einer Zeile im Chord-Format
+ zusammengeführt. Der Cursor befindet sich danach in der nächsten Zeile, so dass
+ Sie einfach mehrmals F9 drücken müssen, um weitere Zeilen zu konvertieren.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Menü Direktiven</title>
+ <para>
+ Mit diesem Menü können Sie Direktiven an der Cursorposition einfügen.
+ Die Bedeutung der Direktiven ist in <xref linkend="directives"/> erläutert.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Menü Liederbuch</title>
+ <para>
+ Fügen Sie die Direktiven zur Erstellung von Liederbüchern ein, statt sie
+ von Hand einzutippen. Die Bedeutung dieser Direktiven ist in
+ <xref linkend="songbook"/> erläutert.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Menü Farben</title>
+ <para>
+ Mit diesem Menü können Sie die Direktiven zur Anpassung der Farben einfügen
+ Es wird ein Farbauswahldialog aufgerufen (siehe <xref linkend="fig:color"/>).
+ </para>
+
+ <figure id="fig:color">
+ <title>Farbauswahldialog</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/color_selector.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ Sie haben drei Möglichkeiten, die gewünschte Farbe auszuwählen:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>doppelklicken Sie auf eine vordefinierte Farbe in der Liste auf der linken Seite</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>bewegen Sie die Schieber in der Mitte des Dialogfeldes
+ (wählen Sie zuerst den gebräuchlicheren RGB-Farbraum anstelle von HSB)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>geben Sie den RGB-Wert manuell in das Feld Name ein, keine wirklich
+ gute Idee :-)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ Die Farb-Direktiven können auch manuell eingegeben werden.
+ Sie werden in <xref linkend="color"/> erklärt.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="transpose">
+ <title>Menü Transponieren</title>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Hoch, Runter</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Diese beiden Befehle transponieren das Stück um einen Halbton nach oben oder unten.
+ Sie können die Tasten F5 und F6 an Stelle des Menüs verwenden. In Akkorden mit Bass
+ (z.B. G/B) werden sowohl der Akkord als auch die Bassnote transponiert.
+ Schrägstriche dürfen nur in Akkorden mit Bass verwendet werden
+ (siehe <xref linkend="specialchar"/>).
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>b->#, #->b</title>
+ <para>
+ Nach dem Transponieren weiß das Programm natürlich nicht, ob Halbtöne
+ mit # oder b dargestellt werden sollen. Daher werden zunächst alle
+ Halbtöne mit # dargestellt. Sie können dies mit dem Befehl #->b ändern.
+ Alternativ können Sie die Tasten F7 und F8 verwenden.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>B->H, H->B</title>
+ <para>
+ In der deutschen Schreibweise wird die Note B als H geschrieben.
+ Mit diesen Befehlen können Sie von B nach H und umgekehrt umschalten.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Akkord-Schaltflächen</title>
+ <figure id="fig:icons">
+ <title>Akkord-Schaltflächen</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/icons.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ Durch einen Klick auf eine der Akkord-Schaltflächen (siehe <xref linkend="fig:icons"/>)
+ wird der augewählte Akkord an der Cursorposition eingefügt. Danach können Sie
+ den Akkord editieren, z.B. Moll oder Septime einfügen.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Syntax Highlighting</title>
+ <figure id="fig:highlighting">
+ <title>Syntax Highlighting Schaltfläche</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/syntax.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX verfügt über sogenanntes Syntax Highlighting für Direktiven,
+ Kommentare und Akkorde, d.h. die genannten Elemente werden in einer anderen Farbe
+ als der normale Text angezeigt.
+ Sie können die Text- und Hintergrundfarbe selbst wählen, indem Sie die
+ entsprechenden Parameter in der Konfigurationsdatei anpassen.
+ Wenn Sie Direktiven oder Akkorde über Menüs und Schaltflächen einfügen,
+ erfolgt die Einfärbung automatisch. Nach manueller Eingabe klicken Sie einfach
+ auf die Syntax Highlighting Schaltfläche (siehe <xref linkend="fig:highlighting"/>).
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="examples">
+ <title>Screenshots und Beispiele</title>
+
+<section>
+<title>Editor-Fenster</title>
+ <figure id="fig:mainwindow">
+ <title>Editor-Fenster</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/window.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+</section>
+
+
+<section>
+<title>Liedblätter</title>
+
+<example>
+<title>Einelnes Lied</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/song.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Single song sheet</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Einzelnes Lied als Teil eines Liederbuches</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/songbook.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Songbook page</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+</example>
+</section>
+
+<section>
+<title>Akkord-Tabelle</title>
+<para>
+Die folgende Akkord-Tabelle stammt aus dem Songbuch des Autors. Sie wurde mit dem
+untenstehenden Code erstellt.</para>
+<example>
+<title>Akkord-Tabelle</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/chords.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Chord table</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>
+{title:D}
+{define:D 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D+ 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:D4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D6 1 x 0 0 2 0 2}
+{define:D7 1 x x 0 2 1 2}
+{define:D7#9 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D7(#9) 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D9 0 1 3 1 2 1 3}
+{define:D11 1 3 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:Dsus 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:Dsus2 1 0 0 0 2 3 0}
+{define:Dsus4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D7sus2 1 x 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:D7sus4 1 x 0 0 2 1 3}
+{define:Dmaj 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:Dmaj7 1 x x 0 2 2 2}
+{define:Ddim 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dmin 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:D/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/E 7 x 1 1 1 1 x}
+{define:D/G 1 3 x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D5/E 7 0 1 1 1 x x}
+{define:Dadd9 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D(add9) 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D9add6 0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+{define:D9(add6)0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+
+{define:Dm6(5b) 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm7 1 x x 0 2 1 1}
+{define:Dm#5 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm(#5) 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm#7 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm(#7) 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm(F) 1 x x 3 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm9 1 x x 3 2 1 0}
+</programlisting>
+</example>
+</section>
+
+<section>
+<title>Indexseite</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/index.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Index Page</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+</section>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="gtx2tex">
+ <title>Das Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex</title>
+
+<para>
+Wenn Sie den Editor GuitarTeX nicht verwenden wollen, oder Ihre
+Postscript- und PDF-Dateien lieber über die Kommandozeile erstellen,
+verwenden Sie das Programm gtx2tex.
+</para>
+
+<refentry>
+
+<refmeta>
+<refentrytitle>gtx2tex</refentrytitle>
+</refmeta>
+
+<refnamediv>
+<refname>gtx2tex</refname>
+<refpurpose>konvertiert Chord-Dateien in die Formate TeX, Postscript oder PDF
+format</refpurpose> </refnamediv>
+
+<refsynopsisdiv>
+<synopsis>
+gtx2tex [--verbose] [--lyrics] [--output=ps|pdf] [--italian] <file>
+</synopsis>
+</refsynopsisdiv>
+
+<refsect1><title>Optionen</title>
+<para>
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>verbose</term>
+ <listitem><para>gtx2tex bereichtet, was gerade abläuft</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>lyrics</term>
+ <listitem><para>es wird nur der Text (ohne Akkorde) ausgegeben</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>output=ps|pdf</term>
+ <listitem><para>legen Sie das Ausgabeformat fest; ohne Angabe wird
+ TeX ausgegeben</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>italian</term>
+ <listitem><para>die Ausgabe der Akkorde erfolgt in italienischer Notation
+ (Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si)</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ </variablelist>
+</para>
+</refsect1>
+
+</refentry>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC
+ "-//Norman Walsh//DTD DocBk XML V4.1.2//EN"
+ "/usr/share/sgml/db41xml/docbookx.dtd" [
+<!ENTITY info SYSTEM "info.xml">
+<!ENTITY intro SYSTEM "introduction.xml">
+<!ENTITY install SYSTEM "installation.xml">
+<!ENTITY gtx2tex SYSTEM "gtx2tex.xml">
+<!ENTITY editor SYSTEM "editor.xml">
+<!ENTITY directives SYSTEM "directives.xml">
+<!ENTITY latex SYSTEM "latex.xml">
+<!ENTITY examples SYSTEM "examples.xml">
+<!ENTITY links SYSTEM "links.xml">
+<!ENTITY acknowledgements SYSTEM "acknowledgements.xml">
+<!ENTITY sflogo SYSTEM "sflogo.xml">
+]>
+
+<book lang="de">
+ <title>GuitarTeX</title>
+
+ &info;
+ &intro;
+ &install;
+ >x2tex;
+ &editor;
+ &directives;
+ &latex;
+ &examples;
+ &links;
+
+ &acknowledgements;
+
+</book>
--- /dev/null
+book1.html
+introduction.html
+c82.html
+requirements.html
+installation.html
+configfile.html
+gtx2tex.html
+r193.html
+editor.html
+x227.html
+x298.html
+x305.html
+directives.html
+geometry.html
+x447.html
+x519.html
+songbook.html
+tablature.html
+others.html
+latex.html
+x750.html
+examples.html
+x819.html
+x847.html
+x864.html
+links.html
+x883.html
+a906.html
+ln12.html
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Dank und Anerkennung</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Links" href="x883.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="appendix">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x883.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="appendix">
+ <h1><a name="AEN906">Anhang A. Dank und Anerkennung</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="variablelist">
+ <p><b>Danke an ...</b></p>
+
+ <dl>
+ <dt>Lucio F. Albenga</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Spanien für seine spanische
+ Übersetzung</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>David Cuny</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Kanada für seine Hilfe bei der Erstellung
+ der ersten Version dieser Dokumentation</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Brian Ewins</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Schottland für sein Programm PStab und den
+ Manual Song</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Bernhard Gröne</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Deutschland, der mir sein Programm
+ Liederbuchgenerator zur Verfügung gestellt hat</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Christoph Lange</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Deutschland für seine
+ FindBin-Ergänzung</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Gary Lawrence Murphy</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Kanada für seine Tipps und die Tests von
+ mehreren Versionen</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Pawel Pastula</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Polen für seine polnische
+ Übersetzung</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Kasper Peeters</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus England für das LaTeX-Paket gchords</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Marcelo Pereira</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Brasilien für seine Übersetzung</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Daniele Pighin</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Italien für viele Vorschläge und seine
+ Übersetzung</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>Dan Polansky</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>aus Tschechien für sein Programm ChordPack</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>den Leuten von Sourceforge.net und Freshmeat.net</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>für ihre großartigen
+ Opensource-Server</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>allen Leuten der Opensource-Familie</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>die Linux, KDE, LaTeX, MusixTeX,Perl und viele
+ andere Programme entwickelt haben, auf denen GuitarTeX
+ basiert</p>
+ </dd>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x883.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"> </td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Links</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>GuitarTeX</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Einführung" href=
+ "introduction.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="book">
+ <div class="BOOK">
+ <a name="AEN1"></a>
+
+ <div class="TITLEPAGE">
+ <h1 class="title"><a name="AEN1">GuitarTeX</a></h1>
+
+ <h3 class="author"><a name="AEN4">Joachim Miltz</a></h3>
+
+ <p class="copyright"><a href="ln12.html">Copyright</a>
+ © 2000-2002 von Joachim Miltz</p>
+
+ <div>
+ <div class="abstract">
+ <a name="AEN16"></a>
+
+ <p> GuitarTeX ist ein Werkzeug für
+ Gitarristen, die gut aussehende Ausdrucke ihrer
+ Musikstücke oder Liederbücher aus ihren
+ Chord- oder Chordpro-Dateien anfertigen wollen. Es
+ benutzt das weit verbreitete Chord Format mit einigen
+ Erweiterungen. Das Programm wurde unter Linux
+ entwickelt, sollte aber auch auf anderen Unix- systemen
+ mit Perl/TK-Umgebung laufen. Die Anleitung zur
+ Installation finden Sie in <a href=
+ "installation.html">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>Installation</i> in Kapitel 2</a>, die
+ Systemvoraussetzungen in <a href=
+ "requirements.html">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>Systemanforderungen</i> in Kapitel 2</a>.</p>
+
+ <p>hosted by <a href="http://sourceforge.net" target=
+ "_top">Sourceforge.net <span class=
+ "inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1"
+ alt="SourceForge Logo"></span></a></p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <hr>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt>1. <a href=
+ "introduction.html">Einführung</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>2. <a href="c82.html">Installation</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="c82.html#AEN84">Woher bekomme ich
+ GuitarTeX?</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "requirements.html">Systemanforderungen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="installation.html">Installation</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "configfile.html">Konfigurationsdatei</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>3. <a href="gtx2tex.html">Das Textfilterprogramm
+ gtx2tex</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href=
+ "r193.html">gtx2tex</a> -- konvertiert
+ Chord-Dateien in die Formate TeX, Postscript oder PDF
+ format</dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>4. <a href="editor.html">Der Editor
+ GuitarTeX</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="editor.html#AEN223">Starten</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html">Menüs</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="x227.html#filemenu">Menü
+ Datei</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html#AEN248">Menü
+ Bearbeiten</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html#AEN261">Menü
+ Direktiven</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html#AEN265">Menü
+ Liederbuch</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html#AEN269">Menü
+ Farben</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html#transpose">Menü
+ Transponieren</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "x298.html">Akkord-Schaltflächen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x305.html">Syntax Highlighting</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>5. <a href="directives.html">Unterstützte
+ Chord-Direktiven</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="directives.html#specialchar">Spezielle
+ Zeichen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="geometry.html">Seitenlayout</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href=
+ "geometry.html#AEN341">Seitenlayout</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "geometry.html#AEN347">Optionen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "geometry.html#AEN426">Beispiele</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html">Dokumentstrukur</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN449">title</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN458">subtitle</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN466">sob, eob</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN478">soc, eoc</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN490">soi, eoi</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN497">np</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html#AEN505">sot, eot</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt><a href="x519.html">Fonts</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="x519.html#AEN522">font_size</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x519.html#color">color_xxx</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt><a href="songbook.html">Ein Liederbuch (Songbook)
+ erstellen</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href=
+ "songbook.html#AEN555">document_class</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="songbook.html#AEN577">book_title,
+ book_author, book_date</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "songbook.html#AEN587">chapter</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "songbook.html#include">include</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="songbook.html#AEN603">even</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt><a href="tablature.html">Gitarren- und
+ Bass-Tabulaturen</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href=
+ "tablature.html#AEN635">Beispiele</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt><a href="others.html">Andere</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="others.html#AEN693">define</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="others.html#AEN713">comment</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="others.html#AEN720">margin</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="others.html#AEN727">second</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>6. <a href="latex.html">LaTeX Kommandos und Packete
+ verwenden</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="latex.html#AEN736">LaTeX
+ Kommandos</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x750.html">LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX,
+ MusixLyr und TabDefs</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href=
+ "x750.html#musixtex_examples">Beispiele</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>7. <a href="examples.html">Screenshots und
+ Beispiele</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href=
+ "examples.html#AEN814">Editor-Fenster</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x819.html">Liedblätter</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x847.html">Akkord-Tabelle</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x864.html">Indexseite</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>8. <a href="links.html">Links</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="links.html#contacts">Kontakte</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x883.html">Links</a></dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <dl>
+ <dt><a href="x883.html#AEN885">LaTeX</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x883.html#AEN891">Perl</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x883.html#AEN897">Guitar
+ Sites</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+ </dl>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>A. <a href="a906.html">Dank und Anerkennung</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="LOT">
+ <dl class="LOT">
+ <dt><b>Tabellenverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt>2-1. <a href=
+ "configfile.html#AEN125">Konfigurationsparameter</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-1. <a href="geometry.html#AEN349">Optionen der
+ Direktive <b class="command">geometry</b></a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="LOT">
+ <dl class="LOT">
+ <dt><b>Abbildungsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt>1-1. <a href=
+ "introduction.html#manualsong">Druckausgabe der
+ Beispieldatei</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>4-1. <a href=
+ "x227.html#fig:exporticons">Schaltflächen für
+ die Ausgabe im LaTeX-, Postscript oder
+ PDF-Format</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>4-2. <a href=
+ "x227.html#fig:color">Farbauswahldialog</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>4-3. <a href=
+ "x298.html#fig:icons">Akkord-Schaltflächen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>4-4. <a href="x305.html#fig:highlighting">Syntax
+ Highlighting Schaltfläche</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-1. <a href="tablature.html#fig:tablature">Tabulatur
+ Schaltflächen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-2. <a href=
+ "others.html#fig:chord">Akkord-Symbole</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>7-1. <a href=
+ "examples.html#fig:mainwindow">Editor-Fenster</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="LOT">
+ <dl class="LOT">
+ <dt><b>Beispiele</b></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-1. <a href="x447.html#AEN454">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">title</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-2. <a href="x447.html#AEN462">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">subtitle</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-3. <a href="x447.html#AEN473">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">sob</b>, <b class="command">eob</b> (aus Here,
+ There And Everywhere, Beatles):</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-4. <a href="x447.html#AEN485">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">soc</b>, <b class="command">eoc</b> (aus With A
+ Litle Help From My Friends, Beatles):</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-5. <a href="x447.html#AEN501">Directive <b class=
+ "command">np</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-6. <a href="x447.html#AEN512">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">sot</b>, <b class="command">eot</b> (aus Pretty
+ Woman, Roy Orbison):</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-7. <a href="x519.html#AEN525">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">font_size</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-8. <a href="x519.html#AEN548">Direktive <b class=
+ "command">color_chorus</b> (Refrain in
+ hellblau):</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-9. <a href="songbook.html#AEN563">Direktive <b
+ class="command">document_class</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-10. <a href="songbook.html#AEN580">Direktive <b
+ class="command">book_title</b>, <b class=
+ "command">book_author</b>, <b class=
+ "command">book_date</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-11. <a href="songbook.html#AEN590">Direktive <b
+ class="command">chapter</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-12. <a href="songbook.html#AEN598">Direktive <b
+ class="command">include</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-13. <a href="songbook.html#AEN607">Direktive <b
+ class="command">even</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-14. <a href="tablature.html#AEN637">Leere
+ Gitarren-Tabulatur</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-15. <a href="tablature.html#AEN646">Eine
+ Bass-Tabulatur mit Text</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-16. <a href="tablature.html#AEN655">Noten,
+ Taktstriche und Leerraum</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-17. <a href="tablature.html#AEN664">Text unter den
+ Noten anordnen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-18. <a href="tablature.html#AEN673">Eine einfache
+ Bass-Tabulatur</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-19. <a href=
+ "tablature.html#AEN682">Akkorde</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-20. <a href="others.html#AEN704">Direktive <b
+ class="command">define</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-21. <a href="others.html#AEN716">Direktive <b
+ class="command">comment</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-22. <a href="others.html#AEN723">Directive <b
+ class="command">margin</b></a></dt>
+
+ <dt>5-23. <a href="others.html#AEN730">Direktive <b
+ class="command">second</b> (aus Help!, The
+ Beatles)</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>6-1. <a href="latex.html#AEN739">LaTeX Kommando in
+ Chord-Datei</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>6-2. <a href="latex.html#AEN745">LaTeX Kommando
+ für die Präambel</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>6-3. <a href="x750.html#AEN770">MusixTeX</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>6-4. <a href="x750.html#AEN784">Tempo-Angabe</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>6-5. <a href="x750.html#AEN798">Verbesserter Satz von
+ Text mit MusixLyr</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>7-1. <a href="x819.html#AEN821">Einelnes
+ Lied</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>7-2. <a href="x819.html#AEN834">Einzelnes Lied als
+ Teil eines Liederbuches</a></dt>
+
+ <dt>7-3. <a href=
+ "x847.html#AEN850">Akkord-Tabelle</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "introduction.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Einführung</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Installation</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Einführung" href=
+ "introduction.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Systemanforderungen" href=
+ "requirements.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "introduction.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "requirements.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="AEN82">Kapitel 2. Installation</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="c82.html#AEN84">Woher bekomme ich
+ GuitarTeX?</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "requirements.html">Systemanforderungen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="installation.html">Installation</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "configfile.html">Konfigurationsdatei</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name="AEN84">Woher bekomme ich
+ GuitarTeX?</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Die aktuelle Version bekommen Sie immer auf der
+ Download-Seite des GuitarTeX-Projektes: <a href=
+ "http://sf.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=13226"
+ target=
+ "_top">http://sf.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=13226</a>.</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "introduction.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "requirements.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Einführung</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Systemanforderungen</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Konfigurationsdatei</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Installation" href="c82.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Installation" href=
+ "installation.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Das Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex" href=
+ "gtx2tex.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="sect1">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "installation.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 2.
+ Installation</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "gtx2tex.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name=
+ "configfile">Konfigurationsdatei</a></h1>
+
+ <p> GuitarTeX benötigt eine Konfigurationsdatei
+ namens .guitartexrc in Ihrem home-Verzeichnis. Parameter
+ werden in Perl-Syntax gesetzt, zum Beispiel:</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+$language = "de";
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+
+ <div class="table">
+ <a name="AEN125"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Tabelle 2-1. Konfigurationsparameter</b></p>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <thead>
+ <tr>
+ <th align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Parameter</th>
+
+ <th align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Bedeutung</th>
+ </tr>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">language</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">wählen Sie Ihre
+ bevorzugte Sprache</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">tool_tips</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">schalten Sie die
+ Hilfen für Schaltflächen ein oder aus</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">highlight</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Syntax-Highlighting
+ ein- oder ausschalten</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ highlight_directive_foreground</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Vordergrundfarbe
+ für Direktiven</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ highlight_directive_background</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Hintergrundfarbe
+ für Direktiven</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ highlight_chord_foreground</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Vordergrundfarbe
+ für Akkorde</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ highlight_chord_background</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Hintergrundfarbe
+ für Akkorde</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ highlight_comment_foreground</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Vordergrundfarbe
+ für Kommentare</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ highlight_comment_background</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Hintergrundfarbe
+ für Kommentare</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">font_size</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ Schriftgröße</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">color_chorus</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Druckfarbe für
+ refrain</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">color_bridge</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Druckfarbe für
+ Bridge</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">color_instr</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Druckfarbe für
+ Instrumental-Teil</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">color_tab</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Druckfarbe für
+ ASCII-Tabulaturen</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">color_second</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Druckfarbe für
+ zweite Stimme (Vordergrund)</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+ color_second_back</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Druckfarbe für
+ zweite Stimme (Hintergrund)</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">text_viewer</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Anzeigeprogramm
+ für TeX-Dateien</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">ps_viewer</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Anzeigeprogramm
+ für Postscript-Dateien</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">pdf_viewer</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Anzeigeprogramm
+ für PDF-Dateien</td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "installation.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "gtx2tex.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Installation</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Das
+ Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Syntax Highlighting" href=
+ "x305.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Seitenlayout" href="geometry.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x305.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "geometry.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="directives">Kapitel 5. Unterstützte
+ Chord-Direktiven</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="directives.html#specialchar">Spezielle
+ Zeichen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="geometry.html">Seitenlayout</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x447.html">Dokumentstrukur</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x519.html">Fonts</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="songbook.html">Ein Liederbuch (Songbook)
+ erstellen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="tablature.html">Gitarren- und
+ Bass-Tabulaturen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="others.html">Andere</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Direktiven sind Befehle zwischen geschweiften
+ Klammern, die das Aussehen der erzeugten Ausgabe steuern.
+ Einige häufig benötigte Direktiven können
+ durch eine Abkürzung ersetzt werden (siehe Beispiele).
+ GuitarTeX bringt einige neue Direktiven mit, die das original
+ Chord Programm nicht kennt.</p>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="specialchar">Spezielle
+ Zeichen</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Einige Zeichen haben in GuitarTeX eine besondere
+ Bedeutung:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p># am Anfang einer Zeile markiert einen Kommentar.
+ Die Zeile wird von GuitarTeX ignoriert</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>/ darf nur in Akkorden mit Bass verwendet werden
+ (z.B. A/E)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x305.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "geometry.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Syntax
+ Highlighting</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Seitenlayout</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+.NAVHEADER { display: none }
+.NAVFOOTER { display: none }
+.TOC { display: none }
+
+.NAVTOC { margin-left: 15;
+ display: none }
+
+.NAVBTN { font-size: 10pt }
+
+.TOCTITLE { font-size: 10pt;
+ color: blue;
+ text-decoration: underline; }
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Der Editor GuitarTeX</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="gtx2tex" href="r193.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Menüs" href="x227.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "r193.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x227.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="editor">Kapitel 4. Der Editor GuitarTeX</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="editor.html#AEN223">Starten</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x227.html">Menüs</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "x298.html">Akkord-Schaltflächen</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x305.html">Syntax Highlighting</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name="AEN223">Starten</a></h1>
+
+ <p>Um den Editor GuitarTeX zu starten, öffen Sie eine
+ Shell und geben das Kommando <b class=
+ "command">guitartex</b> ein.</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "r193.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x227.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">gtx2tex</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Menüs</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Screenshots und Beispiele</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title=
+ "LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs" href=
+ "x750.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Liedblätter" href="x819.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x750.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x819.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="examples">Kapitel 7. Screenshots und
+ Beispiele</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href=
+ "examples.html#AEN814">Editor-Fenster</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x819.html">Liedblätter</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x847.html">Akkord-Tabelle</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x864.html">Indexseite</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name=
+ "AEN814">Editor-Fenster</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:mainwindow"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 7-1. Editor-Fenster</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/window.png"></p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x750.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x819.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">LaTeX-Packete
+ MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Liedblätter</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Seitenlayout</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven" href=
+ "directives.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven"
+ href="directives.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Dokumentstrukur" href="x447.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 5.
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x447.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="geometry">Seitenlayout</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Die Direktive geometry bietet flexible
+ Möglichkeiten, das Layout einer Seite anzupassen. Sie
+ benutzt das LaTeX-Paket geometry. Die folgende Beschreibung
+ ist ein (modifizierter) Teil der Original-Dokumentation.</p>
+
+ <p> Das geometry Paket bietet viele automatische
+ Ausrichtungen, so dass nur wenige manuelle Angaben zum
+ Seitenlayout erforderlich sind. In diesem Fall reicht ein
+ einfaches</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:a4paper}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> Das Setzen von Seitenrändern erfolgt mit</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:margin=2.5cm}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> wenn alle Ränder einer Seite 2,5 Zentimeter
+ betragen sollen.</p>
+
+ <p> Längenangaben erfolgen in</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>Zentimeter (cm)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Millimeter (mm)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Inch (in)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Punkt (pt)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN341">Seitenlayout</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Das Seitenlayout besteht aus einer einfachen
+ Struktur: Die Seite (paper) enthält einen
+ Textkörper (total-body, druckbarer Bereich) und
+ Ränder. Der Textkörper besteht aus Kopf- und
+ Fußzeile, dem eigentlichen Text und (optional) den
+ Randbemerkungen. Die vier Ränder heißen
+ left-margin, right-margin, top-margin und
+ bottom-margin.</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+paper: total-body (printable area) and margins
+total-body: head, body(text area), foot and marginal notes
+margins: left-, right-, top- and bottom-margin
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> Jeder Rand wird von der jeweiligen Kante der Seite
+ aus gemessen, z.B. left-margin meint den Abstand zwischen
+ linker Seitenkante und dem Textkörper. Die
+ Größen von paper, totalbody und margins stehen
+ in diesen Ralationen:</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+paperwidth = left + width + right
+paperheight = top + height + bottom
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN347">Optionen</a></h2>
+
+ <div class="table">
+ <a name="AEN349"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Tabelle 5-1. Optionen der Direktive
+ geometry</b></p>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">landscape</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">schaltet um auf
+ Querformat</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">portrait</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">schaltet um auf
+ Hochformat</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">twoside</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">schaltet auf
+ zweiseitige Ausgabe um. Die linken und rechen
+ Ränder werden bei geraden und ungeraden Seiten
+ symetrisch angeordnet.</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">reversemp</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Randbemerkungen
+ erscheinen am linken Rand (statt am rechten
+ Rand)</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">nohead</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">keine Reservierung
+ von Platz für Kopfzeilen</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">nofoot</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">keine Reservierung
+ von Platz für Fußzeilen</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">noheadfoot</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">keine Reservierung
+ von Platz für Kopf- und Fußzeilen</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">a4paper,
+ a5paper,letterpaper, legalpaper</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">spezifizert die
+ Papiergröße. Ohne Wert anzugeben.</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">paperwidth</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Breite des
+ Papiers. paperwidth=<paperwidth></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">paperheight</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Höhe des
+ Papiers. paperheight=<paperheight></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">width</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Breite des
+ Textkörpers. width=<width>or
+ totalwidth=<width>. Diese Angabe sollte nicht
+ mit der Textbreite (textwidth) verwechselt werden.
+ width enthält die Textbreite und die Breite
+ der Randbemerkungen.</td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">height</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Höhe des
+ Textkörpers (einschließlich Kopf- und
+ Fußzeile). height=<height></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">left</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">linker Rand.
+ left=<leftmargin></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">right</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">rechter Rand.
+ right=<rightmargin></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">top</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">oberer Rand.
+ top=<topmargin></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">bottom</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">unterer Rand.
+ bottom=<bottommargin></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">margin</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">alle Ränder.
+ margin=<margin></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">textwidth</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Breite des Textes.
+ textwidth=<width></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">textheight</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Höhe des
+ Textes. textheight=<height></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">marginpar</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Breite der
+ Randbemerkungen. marginpar=<length></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">marginparsep</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Abstand zwischen
+ Text und Randbemerkungen.
+ marginparsep=<length></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">head</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Höhe der
+ Kopfzeile. head=<length></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">headsep</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Abstand zwischen
+ Kopfzeile und Text. headsep=<length></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">foot</td>
+
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">Abstand zwischen
+ Fußzeile und Text. foot=<length></td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN426">Beispiele</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Setzen Sie die Höhe des Textkörpers auf
+ 10in, den unteren Rand auf 2cm. Der obere Rand wird
+ automatisch berechnet:</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:height=10in,bottom=2cm}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p>oder</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{g:height=10in,bottom=2cm}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p>oder</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:height=10in}
+{g:bottom:=2cm}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> Setzen Sie den linken, rechten und oberen Rand auf
+ 3cm, 2cm und 2.5in. Es wird keine Kopfzeile
+ benötige.</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:left=3cm,right=2cm, nohead,
+ top=2.5in}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p>oder</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:left=3cm}
+{geometry:right=2cm}
+{geometry:nohead}
+{geometry:top=2.5in}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p>oder</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{g:left=3cm,right=2cm}
+{g:nohead, top=2.5in}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p>und so weiter ...</p>
+
+ <p> Ändern Sie die Breite der Randbemerkungen auf
+ 3cm</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:marginpar=3cm}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:marginpar=3cm, reversemp}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p>lässt die Randbemerkungen am linken Rand
+ ausgeben.</p>
+
+ <p>Verwenden sie A5-Papier im Querformat:</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{geometry:a5paper, landscape}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x447.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Dokumentstrukur</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Das Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Konfigurationsdatei" href=
+ "configfile.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="gtx2tex" href="r193.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "configfile.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "r193.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="gtx2tex">Kapitel 3. Das Textfilterprogramm
+ gtx2tex</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Wenn Sie den Editor GuitarTeX nicht verwenden wollen,
+ oder Ihre Postscript- und PDF-Dateien lieber über die
+ Kommandozeile erstellen, verwenden Sie das Programm
+ gtx2tex.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "configfile.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "r193.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Konfigurationsdatei</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">gtx2tex</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Installation</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Installation" href="c82.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Systemanforderungen" href=
+ "requirements.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Konfigurationsdatei" href=
+ "configfile.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="sect1">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "requirements.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 2.
+ Installation</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "configfile.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name=
+ "installation">Installation</a></h1>
+
+ <p>Um GuitarTeX zu installieren gehen Sie wie folgt vor:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>stellen Sie sicher, dass LaTeX, Perl und Perl/TK
+ installiert sind (siehe <a href=
+ "requirements.html">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>Systemanforderungen</i></a>)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>entpacken Sie das GuitarTeX-Archiv (z.B. in Ihrem
+ home-Verzeichnis)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>wechseln Sie in das Verzeichnis guitartex-x.x</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>führen Sie folgende Kommandos aus:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>make conf (als normaler Benutzer!, damit wird eine
+ vorhandene Konfigurationsdatei
+ überschrieben!)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>make install (als Benutzer root)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <p>Sie können das Verzeichnis guitartex-x.x nun
+ löschen</p>
+
+ <p> "make conf" kopiert die Konfigurationsdatei nach
+ ~/.guitartexrc. Sie können GuitarTeX durch Änderung
+ der darin enthaltenen Parameter anpassen.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "requirements.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "configfile.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Systemanforderungen</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Konfigurationsdatei</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Einführung</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Installation" href="c82.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="introduction">Kapitel 1.
+ Einführung</a></h1>
+
+ <p> GuitarTeX ist ein Werkzeug für Gitarristen, die
+ gut aussehende Ausdrucke ihrer Musikstücke oder
+ Liederbücher aus ihren Chord- oder Chordpro-Dateien
+ anfertigen wollen. Es benutzt das weit verbreitete Chord
+ Format mit einigen Erweiterungen.</p>
+
+ <p> Es basiert auf einer Idee von Martin Leclerc und
+ Mario Dorion aus Kanada und ihrem Programm Chord (Version 3.5
+ von 1993). Um GuitarTeX zu nutzen, benötigen Sie
+ Kenntnisse des Programmes Chord (wird später
+ erklärt). Obwohl das Satzsystem LaTeX von GuitarTeX
+ genutzt wird, müssen sie wenig (oder nichts) über
+ LaTeX wissen. GuitarTeX produziert Postscript- oder
+ PDF-Dateien automatisch, wenn Sie das möchten. Die von
+ GuitarTeX unterstützten Direktiven des Programms Chord
+ werden in <a href="directives.html">Kapitel 5</a>
+ erläutert.</p>
+
+ <p><b>Eigenschaften</b></p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>Grafische Benutzeroberfläche mit integriertem
+ Editor und Syntax-Highlighting</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Druckt gut aussehende Liedblätter mit Akkorden
+ unter Benutzung von Proportionalschriften</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Ausgabeformate LaTeX, Postscript und PDF</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Kompatibel mit ChordPro-Format, Import von
+ ASCII-Dateien</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Notensatz mit den LaTeX-Packeten MusixTeX, MusixLyr
+ und TabDefs</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Flexibles Seitenlayout (Größe,
+ Ränder...)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Benutzerdefinierte Farben für Refrain, Bridge
+ ...</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Optionale Ausgabe von Akkordsymbolen am Ende eines
+ Stückes</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Transponieren per Mausklick</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Erstellung von einzelnen Liedblättern oder ganzen
+ Liederbüchern mit Inhaltsverzeichnis, Kopfzeilen,
+ Seitennummerierung,und Index</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>ASCII-Tabulaturen und eingebaute Funktionen für
+ Gitarrten- und Bass-Tabulaturen</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Unterstützung für mehrere Sprachen</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Liederbücher können mit Hilfe der Direktive
+ include aus einer Sammlung von Chord-Dateien erstellt
+ werden</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>LaTeX-Kommandos können in Chord-Dateien verwendet
+ werden (für Profis)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <p> GuitarTeX konvertiert eine Datei mit Text und
+ Akkorden im Chord-Format in eine LaTeX-Datei. Ein Beispiel
+ für eine Chord-Datei:</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.
+
+{c:repeat chorus}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> Das ^-Zeichen ist neu für Benutzer anderer
+ Chord-Programme. Die nachfolgenden Zeichen werden
+ hochgestellt. Sie sehen die Ausgabe in <a href=
+ "introduction.html#manualsong">Abbildung 1-1</a>.</p>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="manualsong"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 1-1. Druckausgabe der Beispieldatei</b></p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN68"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE">
+
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/manualsong.png"></p>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Wenn Sie sich mit LaTeX auskennen, können Sie
+ die Ausgabedatei auch manuell verändern, bevor Sie sie
+ in Postscript oder PDF umwandeln. Der Vorteil ist, dass Sie
+ alle Möglichkeiten von LaTeX einschließlich der
+ vielen Zusatzpackete wie graphics oder MusicTeX einsetzen
+ können</p>
+
+ <p>hosted by <a href="http://sourceforge.net" target=
+ "_top">Sourceforge.net <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img
+ src=
+ "http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1"
+ alt="SourceForge Logo"></span></a></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">GuitarTeX</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Installation</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>LaTeX Kommandos und Packete verwenden</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Andere" href="others.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title=
+ "LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs" href=
+ "x750.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "others.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x750.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="latex">Kapitel 6. LaTeX Kommandos und Packete
+ verwenden</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="latex.html#AEN736">LaTeX Kommandos</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x750.html">LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX, MusixLyr
+ und TabDefs</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN736">LaTeX
+ Kommandos</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Wie in der Einführung erwähnt, brauchen
+ Sie nichts über LaTeX zu wissen, um GuitarTeX zu
+ nutzen. Wenn Sie sich mit LaTeX auskennen, können Sie
+ dessen Möglichkeiten nutzen, um Ihre Ergebnisse weiter
+ zu verbessern. Alle Zeilen, die mit einem Backslash
+ beginnen, werden in die erzeute LaTeX-Datei
+ übernommen. Sie können das einfach mit einem
+ Kommando wie diesem testen:</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN739"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 6-1. LaTeX Kommando in Chord-Datei</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+\marginpar{test}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p>Das Ergebnis ist eine Randbemerkung mit dem Wort
+ "test".</p>
+
+ <p> Die LaTeX Kommandos werden an der Stelle
+ ausgeführt, an der sie in der Datei vorkommen. Manche
+ Kommandos müssen allerdings in der sog. Präambel
+ der LaTeX-Datei erscheinen. Das geschieht mit der Direktive
+ <b class="command">preamble</b>:</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN745"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 6-2. LaTeX Kommando für die
+ Präambel</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{preamble:\usepackage(fancyheadings)}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Die Direktive <b class="command">preamble</b> kann
+ irgendwo im Dokument stehen. Die enthaltenen Kommandos
+ erscheinen in der LaTeX-Präambel in der Reihenfolge,
+ in der sie in der Chord-Datei stehen.</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "others.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x750.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Andere</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">LaTeX-Packete
+ MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Links</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Indexseite" href="x864.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Links" href="x883.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="chapter">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x864.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x883.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="chapter">
+ <h1><a name="links">Kapitel 8. Links</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="TOC">
+ <dl>
+ <dt><b>Inhaltsverzeichnis</b></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="links.html#contacts">Kontakte</a></dt>
+
+ <dt><a href="x883.html">Links</a></dt>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="contacts">Kontakte</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Um mit dem Autor und anderen Benutzern Kontakt
+ aufzunehmen, verwenden Sie bitte die Mailingliste: <a href=
+ "http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/guitartex-users"
+ target=
+ "_top">http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/guitartex-users</a></p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x864.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x883.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Indexseite</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Links</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Einführung" href=
+ "introduction.html">
+
+ <title></title>
+ </head>
+
+ <body>
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="legalnotice">
+ <a name="AEN12"></a>
+
+ <p> This program is free software; you can redistribute
+ it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+ License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
+ version.</p>
+
+ <p> This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+ be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+ warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
+ details.</p>
+
+ <p> You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+ Public License along with this program; if not, write to the
+ Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA
+ 02139, USA.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"> </td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Andere</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven" href=
+ "directives.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Gitarren- und Bass-Tabulaturen"
+ href="tablature.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="LaTeX Kommandos und Packete verwenden"
+ href="latex.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "tablature.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 5.
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "latex.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="others">Andere</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN693">define</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Mit der Direktive define können Sie ein
+ Akkord-Symbol am Ende eines Stückes erstellen. Die
+ Direktive kann irgendwo im Stück platziert sein.</p>
+
+ <p>define verfügt über acht Parameter:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>den Akkordnamen</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>die Nummer des ersten Bundes</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>sechs Nummern für die sechs Saiten (ein x
+ bedeutet, dass die Saite nicht gespielt wird)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN704"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-20. Direktive define</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{define:A 1 x 0 2 2 2 0}
+{define:Cm 3 x 1 3 3 2 1}
+{define:Gm/Bb 4 3 2 2 1 x x}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p>Das Ergebnis sieht so aus wie in <a href=
+ "others.html#fig:chord">Abbildung 5-2</a>.</p>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:chord"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 5-2. Akkord-Symbole</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/chord-example.png"></p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN713">comment</a></h2>
+
+ <p>Die Direktive comment fügt einen Text ein, der
+ nicht zum eigentlichen Stück gehört.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN716"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-21. Direktive comment</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{comment: repeat chorus}
+{c: repeat chorus}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN720">margin</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Die Direktive margin erzeugt eine Randbemerkung.
+ Diese können z.B. dazu genutzt werden, Hinweise
+ für den Musiker einzufügen.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN723"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-22. Directive margin</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{margin:Fade Out}
+{m:Fade Out}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN727">second</a></h2>
+
+ <p> In einigen Stücken hat die zweite Stimme
+ nicht nur eine andere Melodie, sondern auch einen anderen
+ oder versetzt gesungenen Text. Bekannte Beispiele sind
+ "California Dreaming" von The Mamas And The Papas und
+ "Help" von den Beatles. Wenn Sie die zweite Stimme mit der
+ Direktive second markieren erscheint sie in weißer
+ Schrift auf grauem Hintergrund. Wegen der proportionalen
+ Schrift müssen Sie ein wenig experimentieren, um die
+ korrekte Ausrichtung zwischen erster und zweiter Stimme zu
+ erhalten.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN730"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-23. Direktive second (aus Help!, The
+ Beatles)</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+[G] When I was younger so much [Hm]younger than today
+{second:When when I was young}
+[Em] I never needed anybody's [C]help in [F]any [G]way
+{second:I never need help in any way}
+[G]But now these days are gone and I'm [Bm]not so self assured
+{second:Now these days are gone}
+[Em] Now I find I've changed my mind,
+{second:And now I find}
+I've [C]opened [F]up the [G]doors
+{second:I've opened up the doors}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "tablature.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "latex.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Gitarren- und
+ Bass-Tabulaturen</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">LaTeX
+ Kommandos und Packete verwenden</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>gtx2tex</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Das Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex" href=
+ "gtx2tex.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Das Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex"
+ href="gtx2tex.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Der Editor GuitarTeX" href=
+ "editor.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="refentry">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "gtx2tex.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">
+ </td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <h1><a name="AEN193">gtx2tex</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="refnamediv">
+ <a name="AEN196"></a>
+
+ <h2>Name</h2>
+ gtx2tex -- konvertiert Chord-Dateien in die Formate
+ TeX, Postscript oder PDF format
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="refsynopsisdiv">
+ <a name="AEN199"></a>
+
+ <h2>Synopsis</h2>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="synopsis">
+ gtx2tex [--verbose] [--lyrics] [--output=ps|pdf] [--italian] <file>
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="refsect1">
+ <a name="AEN201"></a>
+
+ <h2>Optionen</h2>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="variablelist">
+ <dl>
+ <dt>verbose</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>gtx2tex bereichtet, was gerade abläuft</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>lyrics</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>es wird nur der Text (ohne Akkorde) ausgegeben</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>output=ps|pdf</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>legen Sie das Ausgabeformat fest; ohne Angabe wird
+ TeX ausgegeben</p>
+ </dd>
+
+ <dt>italian</dt>
+
+ <dd>
+ <p>die Ausgabe der Akkorde erfolgt in italienischer
+ Notation (Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si)</p>
+ </dd>
+ </dl>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "gtx2tex.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Das
+ Textfilterprogramm gtx2tex</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "gtx2tex.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Der Editor
+ GuitarTeX</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Systemanforderungen</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Installation" href="c82.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Installation" href="c82.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Installation" href="installation.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="sect1">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 2.
+ Installation</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "installation.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name=
+ "requirements">Systemanforderungen</a></h1>
+
+ <p> GuitarTeX wurde unter Linux entwickelt. Es sollte
+ mit allen Linux-Distributionen und auch auf Unix-Systemen
+ laufen. Zusätzlich werden benötigt:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>LaTeX</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Perl</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Perl/TK</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ Um PDF-Dateien auszugeben muss die LaTeX-Installation das
+ Programm
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>pdflatex</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ enthalten. <br>
+ <br>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "installation.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Installation</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "c82.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Installation</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Ein Liederbuch (Songbook) erstellen</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven" href=
+ "directives.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Fonts" href="x519.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Gitarren- und Bass-Tabulaturen" href=
+ "tablature.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x519.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 5.
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "tablature.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="songbook">Ein Liederbuch
+ (Songbook) erstellen</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Die Direktiven document_class und book_...
+ können irgendwo im Dokument platziert werden.</p>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name=
+ "AEN555">document_class</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Die Direktive document_class legt fest, welche Art
+ Dokument Sie erhalten. Es gibt zwei mögliche
+ Werte:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>book</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>article (Voreinstellung)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN563"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-9. Direktive document_class</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{document_class:book}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p>Der Wert "book" erzeugt</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>eine Titelseite</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>ein Inhaltsverzeichnis</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Kopfzeilen mit Seitennummern</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>einen Index</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN577">book_title,
+ book_author, book_date</a></h2>
+
+ <p>Diese drei Direktiven beschreiben den Inhalt der
+ Titelseite.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN580"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-10. Direktive book_title, book_author,
+ book_date</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{book_title:My Favourite Songs}
+{book_author:My Name}
+{book_date:September 2000}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Der Wert in book_title erscheint in den Kopfzeilen
+ auf geraden Seiten.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN587">chapter</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Wenn sie ein Songbook erstellen, können Sie
+ das Dokument mit der Direktive chapter in Kapitel
+ einteilen. Im Dokument erscheint eine Titelseite für
+ jedes neue Kapitel.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN590"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-11. Direktive chapter</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{chapter:Beatles}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Der Name des Kapitels erscheint im
+ Inhaltsverzeichnis und in den Kopfzeilen auf ungeraden
+ Seiten.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="include">include</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Wenn Sie aus einer Sammlung von Chord-Dateien ein
+ Songbook erstellen wollen brauchen Sie diese nicht alle zu
+ einer Datei zusammen zu fassen. Das hat nämlich einige
+ Nachteile, z.B. dass Sie einen einzelnen Song nicht mehr
+ transponieren können. Mit der Direktive include
+ können Sie die Dateien einzeln speichern. Erstellen
+ Sie lediglich eine Songbook-Datei und binden die einzelnen
+ Stücke mit include ein.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN598"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-12. Direktive include</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{document_class:book}
+{book_title:}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 1}
+{include:song file 1}
+{include:song file 2}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 2}
+{include:song file 3}
+{include:song file 4}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p>In diesem Beispiel wurde ein Songbook mit vier
+ Stücken in zwei Kapiteln erstellt.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN603">even</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Die Direktive <b class="command">even</b>
+ lässt ein neues Stück in einem Songbook auf der
+ linken Seite beginnen. Das ist hilfreich, wenn das
+ Stück länger als eine Seite ist, damit man nicht
+ umblättern muss. Die Direktive muss vor der Direktive
+ title eines neuen Stückes angeordnet sein.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN607"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-13. Direktive even</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{even}
+{title:Proud Mary}
+{st:Creedence Clearwater Revival 1972}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x519.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "tablature.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Fonts</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Gitarren- und
+ Bass-Tabulaturen</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Gitarren- und Bass-Tabulaturen</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven" href=
+ "directives.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title=
+ "Ein Liederbuch (Songbook) erstellen" href="songbook.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Andere" href="others.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "songbook.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 5.
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "others.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="tablature">Gitarren- und
+ Bass-Tabulaturen</a></h1>
+
+ <p>GuitarTeX kennt zwei neue Direktiven zur Darstellung von
+ Tabulaturen:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>{guitartab: } für Gitarren-Tabulaturen</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>{basstab: } für Bass-Tabulaturen</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <p> Jede guitartab oder basstab Direktive stellt eine
+ Zeile mit sechs bzw vier Linien dar. Sie können mit
+ {guitartab: } oder {basstab: } auch leere Tabulaturen
+ erzeugen. Setzen Sie eine Leerzeile vor die Direktive, damit
+ die Tabulatur am linken Rand beginnt.</p>
+
+ <p>Die Klammern können enthalten:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>normaler Text, der unterhalb der Tabulatur ausgegeben
+ wird</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Noten im Format [string;fret], z.B. [2;5] für 5.
+ Bund auf der A-Saite</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Taktstriche (durch das Zeichen | dargestellt)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>Zusätzlicher Leerraum mit "_"</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:tablature"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 5-1. Tabulatur Schaltflächen</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/tablature.png"></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Anstatt die Zeilen von Hand einzugeben können
+ Sie die Schaltfächen verwenden (see <a href=
+ "tablature.html#fig:tablature">Abbildung 5-1</a>). Ein Klick
+ auf die Schaltfläche "Gitarre" oder "Bass" fügt die
+ jeweilige Direktive an der aktuellen Cursorposition ein. Um
+ eine Note einzufügen, geben Sie die Nummer des Bundes in
+ das Eingabefeld ein und klicken die gewünschte Saite an.
+ Die Note wird an der aktuellen Cursorposition eingefügt.
+ Danach steht der Cursor wieder im Eingabefeld, so dass Sie
+ nacheinander beliebig viele Noten erfassen können.</p>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN635">Beispiele</a></h2>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN637"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-14. Leere Gitarren-Tabulatur</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{guitartab:}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/tablat1.png" alt=
+ "Tabulatur-Beispiel"></span></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN646"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-15. Eine Bass-Tabulatur mit Text</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{basstab:some text}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/tablat2.png" alt=
+ "Tabulatur-Beispiel"></span></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN655"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-16. Noten, Taktstriche und
+ Leerraum</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{guitartab:[2;3][3;0][3;2][3;3]|[4;0]__[4;2]__[5;0]__[5;1]|}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/tablat3.png" alt=
+ "Tabulatur-Beispiel"></span></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN664"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-17. Text unter den Noten
+ anordnen</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{guitartab:[2;3]do [3;0]re [3;2]mi [3;3]fa |[4;0]so [4;2]la [5;0]si [5;1]do|}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/tablat4.png" alt=
+ "Tabulatur-Beispiel"></span></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN673"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-18. Eine einfache Bass-Tabulatur</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{basstab:[2;5][2;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;7][3;7]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5]}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/tablat5.png" alt=
+ "Tabulatur-Beispiel"></span></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN682"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-19. Akkorde</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{guitartab:[2;3]&[3;5]&[4;5]C (power chord) |[2;3]&[3;2]&[4;0]&[5;1]C chord}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> <span class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/tablat6.png" alt=
+ "Tabulatur-Beispiel"></span></p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "songbook.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "others.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Ein Liederbuch
+ (Songbook) erstellen</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Andere</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Menüs</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Der Editor GuitarTeX" href="editor.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Der Editor GuitarTeX" href=
+ "editor.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Akkord-Schaltflächen" href=
+ "x298.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="sect1">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 4.
+ Der Editor GuitarTeX</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x298.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name="AEN227">Menüs</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Sie können jedes Menü "abreißen",
+ indem Sie auf den ersten Eintrag (-----) klicken. Das kann
+ sehr nützlich sein, wenn Sie einen Befehl mehrmals
+ benutzen wollen.</p>
+
+ <div class="sect2">
+ <h2 class="sect2"><a name="filemenu">Menü
+ Datei</a></h2>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN232">Neu, Öffnen,
+ Speichern, Speichern als, Beenden</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Die Menüpunkte Neu, Öffnen, Speichern,
+ Speichern als, Beenden verhalten sich, wie Sie es von
+ anderen Anwendungen mit grafischer Oberfläche
+ gewohnt sind. Daher wird hier auf eine weitere
+ Beschreibung verzichtet. Alternativ können Sie auf
+ eine der Schaltflächen klicken.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN235">Export > LaTeX ,
+ Export > Postscript, Export > PDF</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Die geöffnete Datei wird gespeichert und
+ dann in das LaTeX-, Postscript- bzw. PDF-Format
+ konvertiert. Der Name der erzeugten Datei entspricht dem
+ ursprünglichen Namen mit der Erweiterung .tex, .ps
+ bzw. .pdf. Alternativ können Sie auf eine der
+ Schaltflächen klicken.</p>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:exporticons"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 4-1. Schaltflächen für die
+ Ausgabe im LaTeX-, Postscript oder PDF-Format</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/latex.png"></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/postscript.png"></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/pdf.png"></p>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+
+ <p> Nachdem die exportierte Datei erstellt wurde,
+ startet ein Programm zu deren Anzeige. Sie können
+ das gewünschte Anzeigeprogramm auswählen, indem
+ Sie die Parameter <b class="command">$text_viewer</b>, <b
+ class="command">$ps_viewer</b> und <b class=
+ "command">$pdf_viewer</b> in der Konfigurationsdatei
+ ändern (siehe <a href="configfile.html">Abschnitt
+ namens <i>Konfigurationsdatei</i> in Kapitel 2</a>).</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect2">
+ <h2 class="sect2"><a name="AEN248">Menü
+ Bearbeiten</a></h2>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN250">Ausschneiden,
+ Kopieren, Einfügen</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Wenn Sie Text ausschneiden, kopieren und
+ einfügen möchten, benutzen Sie die
+ Tastenkombinationen strg-x (ausschneiden), strg-c
+ (kopieren) und strg-v (einfügen).</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN253">Datei
+ einfügen</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Der Befehl startet einen Dateiauswahldialog. Die
+ ausgewählte Datei wird an der Cursorposition
+ eingefügt.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="crd2chopro">crd ->
+ chopro</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Sie werden häufig Musikstücke mit
+ Akkorden in rohem ASCII-Format finden. Diese sehen im
+ Gegensatz zum Chord-Format so aus:</p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+D A7 D
+I print verses in a row,
+ A7 D
+The next line gets put down below,
+ A7 D G G# A
+Mumble mumble rhymes with grow
+ A7susx
+Done this verse, now we go!
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <p> Setzen Sie den Cursor in die erste Zeile (die
+ mit den Akkorden) und rufen den Menüpunkt
+ crd->chopro auf oder drücken Sie die
+ Funktionstaste F). Die Akkordzeile und die folgende
+ Textzeile werden zu einer Zeile im Chord-Format
+ zusammengeführt. Der Cursor befindet sich danach in
+ der nächsten Zeile, so dass Sie einfach mehrmals F9
+ drücken müssen, um weitere Zeilen zu
+ konvertieren.</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect2">
+ <h2 class="sect2"><a name="AEN261">Menü
+ Direktiven</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Mit diesem Menü können Sie Direktiven an
+ der Cursorposition einfügen. Die Bedeutung der
+ Direktiven ist in <a href="directives.html">Kapitel 5</a>
+ erläutert.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect2">
+ <h2 class="sect2"><a name="AEN265">Menü
+ Liederbuch</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Fügen Sie die Direktiven zur Erstellung von
+ Liederbüchern ein, statt sie von Hand einzutippen. Die
+ Bedeutung dieser Direktiven ist in <a href=
+ "songbook.html">Abschnitt namens <i>Ein Liederbuch
+ (Songbook) erstellen</i> in Kapitel 5</a>
+ erläutert.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect2">
+ <h2 class="sect2"><a name="AEN269">Menü
+ Farben</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Mit diesem Menü können Sie die
+ Direktiven zur Anpassung der Farben einfügen Es wird
+ ein Farbauswahldialog aufgerufen (siehe <a href=
+ "x227.html#fig:color">Abbildung 4-2</a>).</p>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:color"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 4-2. Farbauswahldialog</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/color_selector.png"></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Sie haben drei Möglichkeiten, die
+ gewünschte Farbe auszuwählen:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>doppelklicken Sie auf eine vordefinierte Farbe in
+ der Liste auf der linken Seite</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>bewegen Sie die Schieber in der Mitte des
+ Dialogfeldes (wählen Sie zuerst den
+ gebräuchlicheren RGB-Farbraum anstelle von
+ HSB)</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>geben Sie den RGB-Wert manuell in das Feld Name ein,
+ keine wirklich gute Idee :-)</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <p> Die Farb-Direktiven können auch manuell
+ eingegeben werden. Sie werden in <a href=
+ "x519.html#color">Abschnitt namens <i>color_xxx</i> in
+ Kapitel 5</a> erklärt.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect2">
+ <h2 class="sect2"><a name="transpose">Menü
+ Transponieren</a></h2>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN288">Hoch, Runter</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Diese beiden Befehle transponieren das
+ Stück um einen Halbton nach oben oder unten. Sie
+ können die Tasten F5 und F6 an Stelle des Menüs
+ verwenden. In Akkorden mit Bass (z.B. G/B) werden sowohl
+ der Akkord als auch die Bassnote transponiert.
+ Schrägstriche dürfen nur in Akkorden mit Bass
+ verwendet werden (siehe <a href=
+ "directives.html#specialchar">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>Spezielle Zeichen</i> in Kapitel 5</a>).</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN292">b->#,
+ #->b</a></h3>
+
+ <p> Nach dem Transponieren weiß das Programm
+ natürlich nicht, ob Halbtöne mit # oder b
+ dargestellt werden sollen. Daher werden zunächst
+ alle Halbtöne mit # dargestellt. Sie können
+ dies mit dem Befehl #->b ändern. Alternativ
+ können Sie die Tasten F7 und F8 verwenden.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect3">
+ <h3 class="sect3"><a name="AEN295">B->H,
+ H->B</a></h3>
+
+ <p> In der deutschen Schreibweise wird die Note B
+ als H geschrieben. Mit diesen Befehlen können Sie
+ von B nach H und umgekehrt umschalten.</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x298.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Der Editor
+ GuitarTeX</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Akkord-Schaltflächen</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Akkord-Schaltflächen</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Der Editor GuitarTeX" href="editor.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Menüs" href="x227.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Syntax Highlighting" href="x305.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="sect1">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x227.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 4.
+ Der Editor GuitarTeX</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x305.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name=
+ "AEN298">Akkord-Schaltflächen</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:icons"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 4-3. Akkord-Schaltflächen</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/icons.png"></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Durch einen Klick auf eine der
+ Akkord-Schaltflächen (siehe <a href=
+ "x298.html#fig:icons">Abbildung 4-3</a>) wird der
+ augewählte Akkord an der Cursorposition eingefügt.
+ Danach können Sie den Akkord editieren, z.B. Moll oder
+ Septime einfügen.</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x227.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x305.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Menüs</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Syntax
+ Highlighting</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Syntax Highlighting</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Der Editor GuitarTeX" href="editor.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Akkord-Schaltflächen" href=
+ "x298.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven"
+ href="directives.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="sect1">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x298.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 4.
+ Der Editor GuitarTeX</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="sect1">
+ <h1 class="sect1"><a name="AEN305">Syntax
+ Highlighting</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="figure">
+ <a name="fig:highlighting"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Abbildung 4-4. Syntax Highlighting
+ Schaltfläche</b></p>
+
+ <p><img src="../../images/syntax.png"></p>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> GuitarTeX verfügt über sogenanntes Syntax
+ Highlighting für Direktiven, Kommentare und Akkorde,
+ d.h. die genannten Elemente werden in einer anderen Farbe als
+ der normale Text angezeigt. Sie können die Text- und
+ Hintergrundfarbe selbst wählen, indem Sie die
+ entsprechenden Parameter in der Konfigurationsdatei anpassen.
+ Wenn Sie Direktiven oder Akkorde über Menüs und
+ Schaltflächen einfügen, erfolgt die Einfärbung
+ automatisch. Nach manueller Eingabe klicken Sie einfach auf
+ die Syntax Highlighting Schaltfläche (siehe <a href=
+ "x305.html#fig:highlighting">Abbildung 4-4</a>).</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x298.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Akkord-Schaltflächen</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "editor.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Dokumentstrukur</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven" href=
+ "directives.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Seitenlayout" href="geometry.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Fonts" href="x519.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "geometry.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 5.
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x519.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN447">Dokumentstrukur</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN449">title</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Der Titell eines Stückes wird durch die
+ Direktive <b class="command">title</b> markiert. Der Titel
+ wird zentriert mit einer vergrößerten Schrift
+ ausgegeben. In Dokumenten mit mehreren Stücken
+ verursacht <b class="command">title</b> einen
+ Seitenumbruch.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN454"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-1. Direktive title</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{title:Go Down Moses}
+{t:Go Down Moses}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN458">subtitle</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Die Direktive <b class="command">subtitle</b>
+ dient zur Darstellung zusätzlicher Informationen, wie
+ z.B. Interpret oder Komponist.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN462"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-2. Direktive subtitle</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{subtitle:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}
+{st:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN466">sob, eob</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Eine Bridge wird mit <b class="command">sob</b>
+ (start of bridge) am Anfang, und <b class="command">eob</b>
+ (end of bridge) am Ende markiert. Die Bridge wird auf
+ Farbdruckern in blau ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit der
+ Direktive <b class="command">color_bridge</b> angepasst
+ werden (siehe <a href="x519.html#color">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>color_xxx</i></a>).</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN473"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-3. Direktive sob, eob (aus Here, There
+ And Everywhere, Beatles):</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{sob}
+I want her [Ab]everywhere [Fm]
+And if [Bbm]she's beside me [C^7]I know I need [Fm]never care
+[Bb]But to love her [C^7]is to meet her
+{eob}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN478">soc, eoc</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Ein Refrain wird mit <b class="command">soc</b>
+ (start of chorus) am Anfang und mit <b class=
+ "command">eoc</b> (end of chorus) am Ende markiert. Der
+ Refrain wird auf Farbdruckern in rot ausgegeben. Die Farbe
+ kann mit der Direktive <b class="command">color_chorus</b>
+ angepasst werden (siehe <a href="x519.html#color">Abschnitt
+ namens <i>color_xxx</i></a>).</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN485"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-4. Direktive soc, eoc (aus With A Litle
+ Help From My Friends, Beatles):</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{soc}
+Oh, I get [C]by with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Mm, I get [C]high with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Oh, I'm gonna [C]try with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+{eoc}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN490">soi, eoi</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Ein Instrumantal-Teil wird mit <b class=
+ "command">soi</b> (start of instrumental) am Anfang und <b
+ class="command">eoi</b> (end of instrumental) am Ende
+ markiert. Der Instrumental-Teil wird auf Farbdruckern in
+ grau ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit der Direktive <b class=
+ "command">color_instr</b> angepasst werden (siehe <a href=
+ "x519.html#color">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>color_xxx</i></a>).</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN497">np</a></h2>
+
+ <p><b class="command">np</b> steht für "neue Seite"
+ und erzeugt einen Seitenumbruch.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN501"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-5. Directive np</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{np}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN505">sot, eot</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Tabulaturen werden mit <b class="command">sot</b>
+ (start of tablature) am Anfang und <b class=
+ "command">eot</b> (end of tablature) am Ende markiert.
+ Tabulaturen werden auf Farbdruckern in grün
+ ausgegeben. Die Farbe kann mit der Direktive <b class=
+ "command">color_tab directive</b> angepasst werden (siehe
+ <a href="x519.html#color">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>color_xxx</i></a>). Tabulaturen werden in einer
+ nichtproportionalen Schriftart ausgegeben.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN512"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-6. Direktive sot, eot (aus Pretty Woman,
+ Roy Orbison):</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{sot}
+E ---------------------|------------------------------------
+B ---------------------|------------------------------------
+G ---------------------|------------------------------------
+D -----------------0---|-------------------0---4---2---0----
+A -------------2-------|---------------2--------------------
+E -0---0---4-----------|---0---0---4------------------------
+{eot}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Wenn Sie ASCII-Tabulaturen nicht mögen,
+ bietet GuitarTeX Ihnen eine andere Möglichkeit in <a
+ href="tablature.html">Abschnitt namens <i>Gitarren- und
+ Bass-Tabulaturen</i></a>.</p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "geometry.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x519.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Seitenlayout</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Fonts</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Fonts</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven" href=
+ "directives.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Dokumentstrukur" href="x447.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Ein Liederbuch (Songbook) erstellen"
+ href="songbook.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x447.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 5.
+ Unterstützte Chord-Direktiven</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "songbook.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN519">Fonts</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Die Direktiven zur Beeinflussung der Schriftart und
+ -farbe können irgendwo in Ihrer Datei stehen. Trotzdem
+ ist es hilfreich sie am Anfang zu platzieren. Die angegebenen
+ Werte gelten für das ganze Dokument.</p>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN522">font_size</a></h2>
+
+ <p> LaTeX kennt drei Schriftgrößen 10pt,
+ 11pt and 12pt. GuitarTeX nutzt normalerweise 11pt (Titel
+ und Untertitel werden automatisch vergrößert).
+ Wenn Sie z.B. 12pt verwenden wollen, schreiben Sie:</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN525"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-7. Direktive font_size</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{font_size:12}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <p>Achtung: schreiben Sie nicht 12pt statt 12!</p>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="color">color_xxx</a></h2>
+
+ <p> Mit den folgenden Direktiven können Sie die
+ Textfarbe für Refrain, Bridge, Instrumental-Teil
+ Tabulaturen und zweite Stimme anpassen. Für die zweite
+ Stimme können Sie auch die Hintergrundfarbe
+ ändern, so dass Sie z.B. weiße Schrift auf einem
+ farbigen Hintergrund verwenden können. Das erleichtert
+ den Sängern hoffentlich die Orientierung bei mehreren
+ Textzeilen :-)</p>
+
+ <p>Die Direktiven heißen</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>color_chorus</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>color_bridge</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>color_instr</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>color_tab</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>color_second</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>color_second_back</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <p> Als Parameter wird eine durch Kommas getrennte
+ Liste von Werten zwischen null und eins, die die Farben
+ rot, grün und blau repräsentieren.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN548"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 5-8. Direktive color_chorus (Refrain in
+ hellblau):</b></p>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{color_chorus:.5,.5,1}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x447.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "songbook.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Dokumentstrukur</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "directives.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Ein Liederbuch
+ (Songbook) erstellen</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="LaTeX Kommandos und Packete verwenden"
+ href="latex.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title=
+ "LaTeX Kommandos und Packete verwenden" href="latex.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Screenshots und Beispiele" href=
+ "examples.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "latex.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 6.
+ LaTeX Kommandos und Packete verwenden</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN750">LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX,
+ MusixLyr und TabDefs</a></h1>
+
+ <p>MusixTeX ist ein mächtiges LaTeX-Packet für
+ Notensatz. MusixLyr und TabDefs sind Ergänzungen zu
+ MusixTeX für noch bessere Darstellung von Text und
+ Tabulaturen. Sie können diese Packete GuitarTeX direkt
+ verwenden, indem Sie eine (oder mehrere) dieser Direktiven
+ irgendwo in Ihre Chord-Datei schreiben:</p>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p>{musixtex}</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>{musixlyr}</p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p>{tabdefs}</p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+
+ <div class="important">
+ <blockquote class="important">
+ <p><b>Wichtig:</b> Sie müssen die Packete korrekt
+ installiert haben, um sie zu benutzen. Bitte lesen Sie
+ die Dokumentation zu den Packeten.</p>
+ </blockquote>
+ </div>
+
+ <p> Sie können nun LaTeX-Kommandos aus den Packeten
+ MusixTeX, MusixLyr oder TabDefs an jeder Stelle in der Datei
+ verwenden oder mit include einbinden (Beispiele siehe <a
+ href="x750.html#musixtex_examples">Abschnitt namens
+ <i>Beispiele</i></a>).</p>
+
+ <table class="sidebar" border="1" cellpadding="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+ <div class="sidebar">
+ <a name="AEN764"></a>
+
+ <p><b> Übribens: beachten Sie den ersten
+ Satz aus dem MusixTeX-Handbuch:</b></p>
+
+ <p> "Wenn Sie sich mit LaTeX nicht wirklich
+ auskennen schlage ich vor, ein anderes Programm
+ für den Notensatz zu verwenden. MusixTeX zu
+ installieren und zu beherrschen ist ein Sch...-Job,
+ der viel Zeit und Plattenplatz verbraucht. Aber wenn
+ Sie es geschafft haben..."</p>
+
+ <p> Bitte haben Sie Verständnis, dass der
+ Autor von GuitarTeX keinen Support für die
+ Installation oder die Anwendung von MusixTeX,
+ MusixLyr oder TabDefs geben kann.</p>
+ </div>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name=
+ "musixtex_examples">Beispiele</a></h2>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN770"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 6-3. MusixTeX</b></p>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN773"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span
+ class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/musixtex1.png" alt=
+ "MusixTeX"></span> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{musixtex}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\hsize=100mm
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
+\parindent 0pt
+\setsign1{-3}
+\startpiece\bigaccid
+\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
+\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
+\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
+\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
+\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
+\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
+\setdoubleBAR
+\stoppiece
+\bigskip
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN784"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 6-4. Tempo-Angabe</b></p>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN787"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span
+ class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/musixtex2.png" alt=
+ "Metronomic indication"></span> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{musixtex}
+{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+
+\notes\metron{\qu}{60}\en
+
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN798"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 6-5. Verbesserter Satz von Text mit
+ MusixLyr</b></p>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN801"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span
+ class="inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/musixlyr1.png" alt=
+ "MusixLyr example"></span> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+{musixtex}
+{musixlyr}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\par{
+\hsize=120mm
+\setlyrstrut
+\resetlyrics
+\setlyrics{Winter1}{Win-ter a-de\rlap{,} a-ber dein Schei-den macht\rlap{,}}
+\setlyrics{Winter2}{schei-den tut weh\rlap,}
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1,Winter2}
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
+\generalsignature2
+\setsongraise1{-2mm}
+\startpiece
+\NOtes\qa{ffe}\en\bar
+\NOTesp\hup d\en\rightrepeat
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1}%
+\NOtes\qa{fgh}\en\bar
+\NOtes\qa h\en
+\Notes\beginmel\Ibu0gf1\qb0g\endmel\tqh0f\en
+\NOtes\qa g\en
+\endpiece
+}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "latex.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">LaTeX Kommandos
+ und Packete verwenden</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "latex.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Screenshots
+ und Beispiele</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Liedblätter</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Screenshots und Beispiele" href=
+ "examples.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Screenshots und Beispiele" href=
+ "examples.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Akkord-Tabelle" href="x847.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 7.
+ Screenshots und Beispiele</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x847.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name=
+ "AEN819">Liedblätter</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN821"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 7-1. Einelnes Lied</b></p>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN824"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span class=
+ "inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/song.png" alt=
+ "Single song sheet"></span> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN834"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 7-2. Einzelnes Lied als Teil eines
+ Liederbuches</b></p>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN837"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span class=
+ "inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/songbook.png" alt=
+ "Songbook page"></span> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x847.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Screenshots und
+ Beispiele</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Akkord-Tabelle</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Akkord-Tabelle</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Screenshots und Beispiele" href=
+ "examples.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Liedblätter" href="x819.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Indexseite" href="x864.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x819.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 7.
+ Screenshots und Beispiele</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x864.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN847">Akkord-Tabelle</a></h1>
+
+ <p> Die folgende Akkord-Tabelle stammt aus dem Songbuch
+ des Autors. Sie wurde mit dem untenstehenden Code
+ erstellt.</p>
+
+ <div class="example">
+ <a name="AEN850"></a>
+
+ <p><b>Beispiel 7-3. Akkord-Tabelle</b></p>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN853"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span class=
+ "inlinemediaobject"><img src=
+ "../../images/chords.png" alt="Chord table"></span>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+
+ <table border="0" bgcolor="#E0E0E0" width="100%">
+ <tr>
+ <td>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ {title:D}
+{define:D 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D+ 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:D4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D6 1 x 0 0 2 0 2}
+{define:D7 1 x x 0 2 1 2}
+{define:D7#9 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D7(#9) 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D9 0 1 3 1 2 1 3}
+{define:D11 1 3 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:Dsus 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:Dsus2 1 0 0 0 2 3 0}
+{define:Dsus4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D7sus2 1 x 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:D7sus4 1 x 0 0 2 1 3}
+{define:Dmaj 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:Dmaj7 1 x x 0 2 2 2}
+{define:Ddim 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dmin 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:D/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/E 7 x 1 1 1 1 x}
+{define:D/G 1 3 x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D5/E 7 0 1 1 1 x x}
+{define:Dadd9 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D(add9) 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D9add6 0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+{define:D9(add6)0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+
+{define:Dm6(5b) 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm7 1 x x 0 2 1 1}
+{define:Dm#5 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm(#5) 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm#7 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm(#7) 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm(F) 1 x x 3 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm9 1 x x 3 2 1 0}
+</pre>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x819.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x864.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Liedblätter</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">
+ Indexseite</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Indexseite</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Screenshots und Beispiele" href=
+ "examples.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Akkord-Tabelle" href="x847.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Links" href="links.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "x847.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 7.
+ Screenshots und Beispiele</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "links.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN864">Indexseite</a></h1>
+
+ <p> </p>
+
+ <div class="informaltable">
+ <a name="AEN867"></a>
+
+ <table border="1" class="CALSTABLE">
+ <tbody>
+ <tr>
+ <td align="LEFT" valign="MIDDLE"> <span class=
+ "inlinemediaobject"><img src="../../images/index.png"
+ alt="Index Page"></span> </td>
+ </tr>
+ </tbody>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <br>
+ <br>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "x847.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "links.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">
+ Akkord-Tabelle</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "examples.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Links</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+ <head>
+ <meta name="generator" content="HTML Tidy, see www.w3.org">
+ <title>Links</title>
+ <meta name="GENERATOR" content=
+ "Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72 ">
+ <link rel="HOME" title="GuitarTeX" href="book1.html">
+ <link rel="UP" title="Links" href="links.html">
+ <link rel="PREVIOUS" title="Links" href="links.html">
+ <link rel="NEXT" title="Dank und Anerkennung" href="a906.html">
+ </head>
+
+ <body class="section">
+ <div class="NAVHEADER">
+ <table summary="Header navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <th colspan="3" align="center">GuitarTeX</th>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%" align="left" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "links.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="80%" align="center" valign="bottom">Kapitel 8.
+ Links</td>
+
+ <td width="10%" align="right" valign="bottom"><a href=
+ "a906.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h1 class="section"><a name="AEN883">Links</a></h1>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN885">LaTeX</a></h2>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p> CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network <a
+ href="http://www.ctan.org" target=
+ "_top">http://www.ctan.org</a></p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN891">Perl</a></h2>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p> CPAN: Comprehensive Perl Archive Network: <a
+ href="http://www.cpan.org" target=
+ "_top">http://www.cpan.org</a></p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="section">
+ <h2 class="section"><a name="AEN897">Guitar Sites</a></h2>
+
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ <p> Top 100 Guitar Sites! <a href=
+ "http://www.top100guitarsites.com" target=
+ "_top">http://www.top100guitarsites.com</a></p>
+ </li>
+
+ <li>
+ <p> Chordpack (ein weiteres auf LaTeX basierendes
+ Programm für Gitarristen) <a href=
+ "http://www.fi.muni.cz/~xpolansk/chordpack/" target=
+ "_top">http://www.fi.muni.cz/~xpolansk/chordpack/</a></p>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+ <div class="NAVFOOTER">
+ <hr align="LEFT" width="100%">
+
+ <table summary="Footer navigation table" width="100%" border=
+ "0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top"><a href=
+ "links.html" accesskey="P">Zurück</a></td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "book1.html" accesskey="H">Zum Anfang</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top"><a href=
+ "a906.html" accesskey="N">Nach vorne</a></td>
+ </tr>
+
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" align="left" valign="top">Links</td>
+
+ <td width="34%" align="center" valign="top"><a href=
+ "links.html" accesskey="U">Nach oben</a></td>
+
+ <td width="33%" align="right" valign="top">Dank und
+ Anerkennung</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ </body>
+</html>
+
--- /dev/null
+<bookinfo>
+ <author>
+ <firstname>Joachim</firstname>
+ <surname>Miltz</surname>
+ </author>
+ <date>January 2002</date>
+ <edition>Version 2.8</edition>
+ <copyright>
+ <year>2000-2002</year>
+ <holder>Joachim Miltz</holder>
+ </copyright>
+ <legalnotice>
+ <para>
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+ under
+ the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+ Software
+ Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
+ version.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ WITHOUT
+ ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+ FITNESS
+ FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
+ details.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ with
+ this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675
+ Mass
+ Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+ </para>
+ </legalnotice>
+
+ <abstract>
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX ist ein Werkzeug für Gitarristen, die gut aussehende Ausdrucke ihrer
+ Musikstücke oder Liederbücher aus ihren Chord- oder Chordpro-Dateien anfertigen wollen.
+ Es benutzt das weit verbreitete Chord Format mit einigen Erweiterungen.
+ Das Programm wurde unter Linux entwickelt, sollte aber auch auf anderen Unix-
+ systemen mit Perl/TK-Umgebung laufen.
+ Die Anleitung zur Installation finden Sie in <xref linkend="installation"/>,
+ die Systemvoraussetzungen in <xref linkend="requirements"/>.
+ </para>
+
+&sflogo;
+
+ </abstract>
+
+
+</bookinfo>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter>
+ <title>Installation</title>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Woher bekomme ich GuitarTeX?</title>
+ <para>
+ Die aktuelle Version bekommen Sie immer auf der Download-Seite
+ des GuitarTeX-Projektes:
+ <ulink url="http://sf.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=13226"/>.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="requirements">
+ <title>Systemanforderungen</title>
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX wurde unter Linux entwickelt.
+ Es sollte mit allen Linux-Distributionen und auch auf Unix-Systemen laufen.
+ Zusätzlich werden benötigt:
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>LaTeX</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Perl</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Perl/TK</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+Um PDF-Dateien auszugeben muss die LaTeX-Installation das Programm
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>pdflatex</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+enthalten.
+</para>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="installation">
+ <title>Installation</title>
+ <para>Um GuitarTeX zu installieren gehen Sie wie folgt vor:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>stellen Sie sicher, dass LaTeX, Perl und Perl/TK installiert sind
+ (siehe <xref linkend="requirements"/>)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>entpacken Sie das GuitarTeX-Archiv (z.B. in Ihrem home-Verzeichnis)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>wechseln Sie in das Verzeichnis guitartex-x.x</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>führen Sie folgende Kommandos aus:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>make conf (als normaler Benutzer!, damit wird eine vorhandene Konfigurationsdatei überschrieben!)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>make install (als Benutzer root)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Sie können das Verzeichnis guitartex-x.x nun löschen</para>
+
+ <para>
+ "make conf" kopiert die Konfigurationsdatei nach ~/.guitartexrc.
+ Sie können GuitarTeX durch Änderung der darin enthaltenen Parameter anpassen.
+</para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="configfile">
+ <title>Konfigurationsdatei</title>
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX benötigt eine Konfigurationsdatei namens .guitartexrc in Ihrem
+ home-Verzeichnis. Parameter werden in Perl-Syntax gesetzt, zum Beispiel:
+ <programlisting>$language = "de";</programlisting>
+ </para>
+
+ <table>
+ <title>Konfigurationsparameter</title>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Parameter</entry>
+ <entry>Bedeutung</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+ <tbody>
+ <row><entry>language</entry>
+ <entry>wählen Sie Ihre bevorzugte Sprache</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>tool_tips</entry>
+ <entry>schalten Sie die Hilfen für Schaltflächen ein oder aus</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight</entry>
+ <entry>Syntax-Highlighting ein- oder ausschalten</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_directive_foreground</entry>
+ <entry>Vordergrundfarbe für Direktiven</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_directive_background</entry>
+ <entry>Hintergrundfarbe für Direktiven</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_chord_foreground</entry>
+ <entry>Vordergrundfarbe für Akkorde</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_chord_background</entry>
+ <entry>Hintergrundfarbe für Akkorde</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_comment_foreground</entry>
+ <entry>Vordergrundfarbe für Kommentare</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_comment_background</entry>
+ <entry>Hintergrundfarbe für Kommentare</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>font_size</entry>
+ <entry>Schriftgröße</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_chorus</entry>
+ <entry>Druckfarbe für refrain</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_bridge</entry>
+ <entry>Druckfarbe für Bridge</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_instr</entry>
+ <entry>Druckfarbe für Instrumental-Teil</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_tab</entry>
+ <entry>Druckfarbe für ASCII-Tabulaturen</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_second</entry>
+ <entry>Druckfarbe für zweite Stimme (Vordergrund)</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_second_back</entry>
+ <entry>Druckfarbe für zweite Stimme (Hintergrund)</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>text_viewer</entry>
+ <entry>Anzeigeprogramm für TeX-Dateien</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>ps_viewer</entry>
+ <entry>Anzeigeprogramm für Postscript-Dateien</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>pdf_viewer</entry>
+ <entry>Anzeigeprogramm für PDF-Dateien</entry></row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ </sect1>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="introduction">
+ <title>Einführung</title>
+
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX ist ein Werkzeug für Gitarristen, die gut aussehende Ausdrucke ihrer
+ Musikstücke oder Liederbücher aus ihren Chord- oder Chordpro-Dateien anfertigen wollen.
+ Es benutzt das weit verbreitete Chord Format mit einigen Erweiterungen.
+</para>
+<para>
+ Es basiert auf einer Idee von Martin Leclerc und Mario Dorion aus Kanada
+ und ihrem Programm Chord (Version 3.5 von 1993). Um GuitarTeX zu nutzen,
+ benötigen Sie Kenntnisse des Programmes Chord (wird später erklärt).
+ Obwohl das Satzsystem LaTeX von GuitarTeX genutzt wird, müssen sie wenig (oder nichts)
+ über LaTeX wissen. GuitarTeX produziert Postscript- oder PDF-Dateien automatisch,
+ wenn Sie das möchten. Die von GuitarTeX unterstützten Direktiven des Programms Chord
+ werden in <xref linkend="directives"/> erläutert.
+ </para>
+
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<title>Eigenschaften</title>
+<listitem><para>Grafische Benutzeroberfläche mit integriertem Editor und Syntax-Highlighting</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Druckt gut aussehende Liedblätter mit Akkorden unter Benutzung von Proportionalschriften</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Ausgabeformate LaTeX, Postscript und PDF</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Kompatibel mit ChordPro-Format, Import von ASCII-Dateien</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Notensatz mit den LaTeX-Packeten MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Flexibles Seitenlayout (Größe, Ränder...)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Benutzerdefinierte Farben für Refrain, Bridge ...</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Optionale Ausgabe von Akkordsymbolen am Ende eines Stückes</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Transponieren per Mausklick</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Erstellung von einzelnen Liedblättern oder ganzen Liederbüchern
+mit Inhaltsverzeichnis, Kopfzeilen, Seitennummerierung,und Index</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>ASCII-Tabulaturen und eingebaute Funktionen für Gitarrten- und Bass-Tabulaturen</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Unterstützung für mehrere Sprachen</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Liederbücher können mit Hilfe der Direktive include aus einer Sammlung
+von Chord-Dateien erstellt werden</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>LaTeX-Kommandos können in Chord-Dateien verwendet werden (für Profis)</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX konvertiert eine Datei mit Text und Akkorden im Chord-Format
+ in eine LaTeX-Datei. Ein Beispiel für eine Chord-Datei:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.
+
+{c:repeat chorus}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Das ^-Zeichen ist neu für Benutzer anderer Chord-Programme.
+ Die nachfolgenden Zeichen werden hochgestellt. Sie sehen die Ausgabe in
+ <xref linkend="manualsong"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure id="manualsong">
+ <title>Druckausgabe der Beispieldatei</title>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/manualsong.png"/>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ Wenn Sie sich mit LaTeX auskennen, können Sie die Ausgabedatei auch manuell
+ verändern, bevor Sie sie in Postscript oder PDF umwandeln. Der Vorteil ist,
+ dass Sie alle Möglichkeiten von LaTeX einschließlich der vielen Zusatzpackete
+ wie graphics oder MusicTeX einsetzen können
+ </para>
+
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="latex">
+ <title>LaTeX Kommandos und Packete verwenden</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>LaTeX Kommandos</title>
+ <para>
+ Wie in der Einführung erwähnt, brauchen Sie nichts über LaTeX zu wissen, um
+ GuitarTeX zu nutzen.
+ Wenn Sie sich mit LaTeX auskennen, können Sie dessen Möglichkeiten nutzen, um Ihre
+ Ergebnisse weiter zu verbessern. Alle Zeilen, die mit einem Backslash beginnen,
+ werden in die erzeute LaTeX-Datei übernommen. Sie können das einfach mit einem Kommando
+ wie diesem testen:
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>LaTeX Kommando in Chord-Datei</title>
+ <programlisting>\marginpar{test}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>Das Ergebnis ist eine Randbemerkung mit dem Wort "test".</para>
+
+ <para>
+ Die LaTeX Kommandos werden an der Stelle ausgeführt, an der sie in der Datei vorkommen.
+ Manche Kommandos müssen allerdings in der sog. Präambel der LaTeX-Datei
+ erscheinen. Das geschieht mit der Direktive <command>preamble</command>:
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>LaTeX Kommando für die Präambel</title>
+ <programlisting>{preamble:\usepackage(fancyheadings)}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ Die Direktive <command>preamble</command> kann irgendwo im Dokument stehen.
+ Die enthaltenen Kommandos erscheinen in der LaTeX-Präambel in der Reihenfolge,
+ in der sie in der Chord-Datei stehen.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+ <section>
+ <title>LaTeX-Packete MusixTeX, MusixLyr und TabDefs</title>
+ <para>MusixTeX ist ein mächtiges LaTeX-Packet für Notensatz. MusixLyr
+ und TabDefs sind Ergänzungen zu MusixTeX für noch bessere Darstellung von
+ Text und Tabulaturen. Sie können diese Packete GuitarTeX direkt verwenden, indem Sie
+ eine (oder mehrere) dieser Direktiven irgendwo in Ihre Chord-Datei schreiben:
+</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>{musixtex}</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>{musixlyr}</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>{tabdefs}</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<important><para>
+Sie müssen die Packete korrekt installiert haben, um sie zu benutzen.
+Bitte lesen Sie die Dokumentation zu den Packeten.
+</para></important>
+
+<para>
+Sie können nun LaTeX-Kommandos aus den Packeten MusixTeX, MusixLyr oder TabDefs
+an jeder Stelle in der Datei verwenden oder mit include einbinden
+(Beispiele siehe <xref linkend="musixtex_examples"/>).
+</para>
+
+<sidebar>
+<title>
+
+Übribens: beachten Sie den ersten Satz aus dem MusixTeX-Handbuch:
+
+</title>
+<para>
+"Wenn Sie sich mit LaTeX nicht wirklich auskennen schlage ich vor, ein anderes
+Programm für den Notensatz zu verwenden. MusixTeX zu installieren und zu
+beherrschen ist ein Sch...-Job, der viel Zeit und Plattenplatz verbraucht.
+Aber wenn Sie es geschafft haben..."
+</para>
+<para>
+Bitte haben Sie Verständnis, dass der Autor von GuitarTeX keinen Support für
+die Installation oder die Anwendung von MusixTeX, MusixLyr oder TabDefs geben kann.
+</para>
+</sidebar>
+ <section id="musixtex_examples">
+ <title>Beispiele</title>
+
+<example>
+<title>MusixTeX</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/musixtex1.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>MusixTeX</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>{musixtex}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\hsize=100mm
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
+\parindent 0pt
+\setsign1{-3}
+\startpiece\bigaccid
+\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
+\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
+\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
+\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
+\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
+\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
+\setdoubleBAR
+\stoppiece
+\bigskip
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.</programlisting>
+
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Tempo-Angabe</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/musixtex2.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Metronomic indication</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>{musixtex}
+{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+
+\notes\metron{\qu}{60}\en
+
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!</programlisting>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Verbesserter Satz von Text mit MusixLyr</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/musixlyr1.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>MusixLyr example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>{musixtex}
+{musixlyr}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\par{
+\hsize=120mm
+\setlyrstrut
+\resetlyrics
+\setlyrics{Winter1}{Win-ter a-de\rlap{,} a-ber dein Schei-den macht\rlap{,}}
+\setlyrics{Winter2}{schei-den tut weh\rlap,}
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1,Winter2}
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
+\generalsignature2
+\setsongraise1{-2mm}
+\startpiece
+\NOtes\qa{ffe}\en\bar
+\NOTesp\hup d\en\rightrepeat
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1}%
+\NOtes\qa{fgh}\en\bar
+\NOtes\qa h\en
+\Notes\beginmel\Ibu0gf1\qb0g\endmel\tqh0f\en
+\NOtes\qa g\en
+\endpiece
+}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.</programlisting>
+</example>
+
+</section>
+
+</section>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="links">
+ <title>Links</title>
+
+ <section id="contacts">
+ <title>Kontakte</title>
+ <para>
+ Um mit dem Autor und anderen Benutzern Kontakt aufzunehmen, verwenden Sie
+ bitte die Mailingliste: <ulink url="http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/guitartex-users"/>
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Links</title>
+ <section>
+ <title>LaTeX</title>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>
+ CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+ <ulink url="http://www.ctan.org"/>
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Perl</title>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>
+ CPAN: Comprehensive Perl Archive Network:
+ <ulink url="http://www.cpan.org"/>
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Guitar Sites</title>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>
+ Top 100 Guitar Sites!
+ <ulink url="http://www.top100guitarsites.com"/>
+ </para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>
+ Chordpack (ein weiteres auf LaTeX basierendes Programm für Gitarristen)
+ <ulink url="http://www.fi.muni.cz/~xpolansk/chordpack/"/>
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ </section>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+
+<para>hosted by
+<ulink url="http://sourceforge.net">Sourceforge.net
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>SourceForge Logo</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</ulink>
+</para>
--- /dev/null
+html:
+ db2html guitartex.xml
--- /dev/null
+<appendix>
+ <title>Acknowledgements</title>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <title> Thanks to ...</title>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Lucio F. Albenga</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Spain for his translation to the Spanish language
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>David Cuny</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Canada for his help on the first
+ version of this document</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Brian Ewins</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Scottland for his Program PStab and the Manual
+ Song</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Bernhard Gröne</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Germany for sending me his songbook creating scripts
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Christoph Lange</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Germany for adding FindBin support
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Gary Lawrence Murphy</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Canada for his tips and testing on several
+ versions</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Pawel Pastula</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Poland for his translation to the Polish language
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+
+ <term>Kasper Peeters</term>
+ <listitem><para>from United Kingdom for allowing me to use the gchords package to display
+ chord symbols in LaTeX
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Marcelo Pereira</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Brazil for his translation to the Brazilian language
+ </para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Daniele Pighin</term>
+ <listitem><para>from Italy for many suggestions and his translation to the
+ Italian language</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>Dan Polansky</term>
+ <listitem><para>from the Czech Republic for his program Chord
+ Pack</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>the people from Sourceforge.net and Freshmeat.net</term>
+ <listitem><para>for their great open source servers</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ <varlistentry>
+
+ <term>all people from the open source community</term>
+ <listitem><para>who made Linux, KDE, LaTeX, MusixTeX,Perl and many other programs
+ I used to create GuitarTeX</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</appendix>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="directives">
+ <title>Supplied Chord directives</title>
+ <para>
+ Directives are Chord's commands between curly brackets {}, which control
+ the design of the produced output. Some often used directives can be
+ replaced
+ by a short cut (see examples). GuitarTeX provides some new directives
+ not known by the original Chord program.
+ </para>
+
+ <section id="specialchar">
+ <title>Special Characters</title>
+
+ <para>
+ In GuitarTeX some characters have a special meaning:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para># at the beginning of a line marks the line as a comment.
+ The line is ignored by GuitarTeX</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>/ may only be used to write slash
+ chords (e.g. A/E)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="geometry">
+ <title>Page Layout</title>
+ <para>
+ The geometry directive provides an easy and flexible interface to
+ customize
+ page layout. It uses the LaTeX geometry package and it's description here
+ is a
+ (modified) part of the geometry package documentation.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ The geometry directive implements auto-centering and auto-balancing
+ mechanisms
+ so that the users have only to give the least description for the page
+ layout.
+ In this case, what you have to do is just
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:a4paper}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ In addition to this centering problem, setting margins from each edge of
+ the
+ paper is also troublesome. However, with geometry package, you can do
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:margin=1.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ if you want to set each margin 1.5in from each edge of the paper.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ Lengths can be written in
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>Centimeters (cm)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Millimeters (mm)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Inches (in)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Points (pt)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Layout Dimensions</title>
+
+ <para>
+ To realize a straightforward setting for page layout, the following page
+ structure is introduced: A paper contains a total body (printable area)
+ and
+ margins. The total body consists of a body (text area), a header, a
+ footer and a
+ marginal note which is optional. There are four margins: left-, right-,
+ top- and
+ bottom-margin.
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>paper: total-body (printable area) and margins
+total-body: head, body(text area), foot and marginal notes
+margins: left-, right-, top- and bottom-margin</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Each margin is measured from the corresponding edge of a paper. For
+ example,
+ left-margin means a horizontal distance between the left edge of the
+ paper and
+ that of the total body. The dimensions for paper, totalbody and
+ margins have the following relations.
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>paperwidth = left + width + right
+paperheight = top + height + bottom</programlisting>
+ </section> <!--Layout Dimensions-->
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Option List</title>
+
+ <table>
+ <title>Options for <command>geometry</command> directive</title>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>landscape</entry>
+ <entry>switches the paper orientation to landscape mode</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>portrait</entry>
+ <entry>switches the paper orientation to portrait mode</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>twoside</entry>
+ <entry>switches on two-sided printing. In this mode, specified
+ left
+ and right margins are switched over in each odd-numbered
+ page.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>reversemp</entry>
+ <entry>makes the marginal notes appear in the left margin</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>nohead</entry>
+ <entry>eliminates spaces for the head of page</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>nofoot</entry>
+ <entry>eliminates spaces for the foot of page</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>noheadfoot</entry>
+ <entry>eliminates spaces for the head and foot of page</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>a4paper, a5paper,letterpaper, legalpaper</entry>
+ <entry>specifies paper name. They must be used with no
+ values.</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>paperwidth</entry>
+ <entry>width of the paper. paperwidth=<paperwidth></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>paperheight</entry>
+ <entry>height of the paper.
+ paperheight=<paperheight></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>width</entry>
+ <entry>width of the total body. width=<width>or
+ totalwidth=<width>.
+ This dimension should not be confused with textwidth, because
+ width includes
+ the width of marginal notes</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>height</entry>
+ <entry>height of the total body (including header and footer).
+ height=<height></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>left</entry>
+ <entry>left margin of the total body. In other words, the distance
+ between the
+ left edge of the paper and that of the total
+ body.left=<leftmargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>right</entry>
+ <entry>right margin of the total body.
+ right=<rightmargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>top</entry>
+ <entry>top margin of the total body. top=<topmargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>bottom</entry>
+ <entry>bottom margin of the total body.
+ bottom=<bottommargin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>margin</entry>
+ <entry>sets all margins of the total body.
+ margin=<margin></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>textwidth</entry>
+ <entry>modifies width of text (body).
+ textwidth=<width></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>textheight</entry>
+ <entry>modifies height of text (body).
+ textheight=<height></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>marginpar</entry>
+ <entry>modifies width of the marginal notes.
+ marginpar=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>marginparsep</entry>
+ <entry>modifies separation between body and marginal notes.
+ marginparsep=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>head</entry>
+ <entry>modifies height of header. head=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>headsep</entry>
+ <entry>modifies separation between header and text (body).
+ headsep=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>foot</entry>
+ <entry>modifies distance separation between baseline of last line
+ of text and baseline of footer. foot=<length></entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Examples</title>
+
+ <para>
+ Set the height of the total body to be 10in, the bottom-margin 2cm,
+ and the width default. The top-margin will be calculated automatically:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:height=10in,bottom=2cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>or</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{g:height=10in,bottom=2cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>or</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:height=10in}
+{g:bottom:=2cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Set the left-, right-, and top-margin 3cm, 2cm and 2.5in respectively.
+ The page header is not used.
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:left=3cm,right=2cm, nohead,
+ top=2.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>or</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:left=3cm}
+{geometry:right=2cm}
+{geometry:nohead}
+{geometry:top=2.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>or</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{g:left=3cm,right=2cm}
+{g:nohead, top=2.5in}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>and so on ...</para>
+
+ <para>
+ Modify the width of marginal notes to 3cm and include marginal
+ notes when adjusting horizontal partition
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:marginpar=3cm}</programlisting>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:marginpar=3cm, reversemp}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>makes the marginal notes appear in the left margin.</para>
+
+ <para>Use A5 paper in landscape mode.</para>
+
+ <programlisting>{geometry:a5paper, landscape}</programlisting>
+
+ </section>
+ </section> <!--Page Layout-->
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Document Structure</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>title</title>
+ <para>
+ The title of a piece of music is marked by the directive
+ <command>title</command>.
+ The title is printed centered with a larger font. In documents with more
+ than
+ one piece, <command>title</command> causes a page break.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>title</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{title:Go Down Moses}
+{t:Go Down Moses}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>subtitle</title>
+ <para>
+ The directive <command>subtitle</command> supplies additional
+ information, such as the name of the band or the composer.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>subtitle</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{subtitle:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}
+{st:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>sob, eob</title>
+ <para>
+ The bridge is marked with <command>sob</command> (start of bridge) at
+ the beginning,
+ and <command>eob</command> (end of bridge) at the end. The bridge is
+ output
+ in blue if you use a color printer. The color can be changed by the
+ <command>color_bridge</command> directive.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>sob</command>, <command>eob</command>
+ (from Here, There And Everywhere, Beatles):</title>
+ <programlisting>{sob}
+I want her [Ab]everywhere [Fm]
+And if [Bbm]she's beside me [C^7]I know I need [Fm]never care
+[Bb]But to love her [C^7]is to meet her
+{eob}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>soc, eoc</title>
+ <para>
+ The chorus is marked with <command>soc</command> (start of chorus) at
+ the beginning,
+ and <command>eoc</command> (end of chorus) the end. The chorus is output
+ in
+ red if you use a color printer. The color can be changed by the
+ color_chorus
+ directive (see <xref linkend="color"/>).
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>soc</command>, <command>eoc</command>
+ (from With A Litle Help From My Friends, Beatles):</title>
+ <programlisting>{soc}
+Oh, I get [C]by with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Mm, I get [C]high with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Oh, I'm gonna [C]try with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+{eoc}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>soi, eoi</title>
+ <para>
+ An instrumental part is marked with <command>soi</command> (start of
+ instrumental)
+ at the beginning, and <command>eoi</command> (end of instrumental) the
+ end.
+ The instrumental part is output in grey if you use a color printer. The
+ color
+ can be changed by the <command>color_instr</command> directive.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>np</title>
+ <para><command>np</command> stands for new page and creates a page
+ break.</para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>np</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{np}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>sot, eot</title>
+ <para>
+ Tablature is marked with <command>sot</command> (start of tablature) at
+ the
+ beginning, and <command>eot</command> (end of tablature) the end.
+ Tablature
+ output in green if you use a color printer. The color can be changed by
+ the
+ color_tab directive (see <xref linkend="color"/>).
+ The tablature is output in a non-proportional font.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>sot</command>, <command>eot</command>
+ (from Pretty Woman, Roy Orbison):</title>
+ <programlisting>{sot}
+E ---------------------|------------------------------------
+B ---------------------|------------------------------------
+G ---------------------|------------------------------------
+D -----------------0---|-------------------0---4---2---0----
+A -------------2-------|---------------2--------------------
+E -0---0---4-----------|---0---0---4------------------------
+{eot}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ If you don't like ascii tablatures and you look for a way to create
+ tablatures
+ more easily, see <xref linkend="tablature"/>.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ </section> <!--Document structure-->
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Fonts</title>
+
+ <para>
+ The font and color directives can be placed anywhere in the Chord file,
+ though
+ it is usefull to place them at the beginning :-). The specified values are
+ valid
+ for the whole document!
+ </para>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>font_size</title>
+ <para>
+ LaTeX allows the three font sizes 10pt, 11pt and 12pt. GuitarTeX sets
+ the default value to 11pt (titles and subtitles are enlarged
+ automatically). If
+ you want a font size of 12pt you should write:
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>font_size</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{font_size:12}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>Note: do not write 12pt instead of 12!</para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="color">
+ <title>color_xxx</title>
+ <para>
+ The color directives allow to change the text color of the chorus,
+ bridge,
+ instrumental parts, tablatures and a second voice. For the second voice
+ even the
+ background color may be specified. So you can write white letters on a
+ colored
+ background for example. This will help the singers not getting confused
+ by many
+ lyrics lines :-)
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The directives are named</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>color_chorus</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_bridge</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_instr</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_tab</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_second</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>color_second_back</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ The parameters must be a comma separated list of three numbers between 0
+ and
+ 1, giving the red, green and blue components of the color.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>color_chorus</command> (coloring the chorus
+ light blue):</title>
+ <programlisting>{color_chorus:.5,.5,1}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="songbook">
+ <title>Creating a Songbook</title>
+ <para>
+ The document_class and book_... directives can be placed anywhere in the
+ Chord file, though it is usefull to place them at the beginning :-).
+ </para>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>document_class</title>
+
+ <para>
+ The document_class directive specifies the type of document you get.
+ There are two possible values:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>book</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>article (default if not specified)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>document_class</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{document_class:book}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>The value book produces</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>a title page</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>a table of contents</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>headlines with page numbers</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>an index</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>book_title, book_author, book_date</title>
+
+ <para>These three directives describe the content of the title
+ page.</para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>
+ Directive <command>book_title</command>,
+ <command>book_author</command>, <command>book_date</command>
+ </title>
+ <programlisting>{book_title:My Favourite Songs}
+{book_author:My Name}
+{book_date:September 2000}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ The value given in the book_title directive appears
+ in the headlines on even pages.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>chapter</title>
+
+ <para>
+ If the document_class is <command>book</command>, you can section
+ the document with the chapter directive. A chapter title page is
+ inserted at the occurance of the directive.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>chapter</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{chapter:Beatles}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ The chapter name appears in the table of contents and also
+ in the headlines on odd pages.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="include">
+ <title>include</title>
+ <para>
+ If you have a collection of chord files you may want to create a
+ songbook (or
+ even several different songbooks) without merging all songs to one
+ single file.
+ Merging all files has some disadvantages, e.g. transposing one single
+ song is
+ no longer possible. With the include directive you may leave all files
+ as they
+ are. Just create a songbook file and include the files you want.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>include</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{document_class:book}
+{book_title:}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 1}
+{include:song file 1}
+{include:song file 2}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 2}
+{include:song file 3}
+{include:song file 4}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>In the example four song files are merged to a songbook with two
+ chapters.</para>
+
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>even</title>
+
+ <para>
+ The directive <command>even</command> makes the piece begin on the next
+ left
+ page. In a book this is useful for preventing a page turn in an two-page
+ piece.
+ The directive must be placed before the title directive in order to work
+ correctly.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>even</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{even}
+{title:Proud Mary}
+{st:Creedence Clearwater Revival 1972}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+ </section>
+
+ <section id="tablature">
+ <title>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</title>
+
+ <para>GuitarTeX knows two new directives for printing tablature
+ lines:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>{guitartab: } for guitar tablatures</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>{basstab: } for bass tablatures</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ Every guitartab or basstab directive represents one line of tablature.
+ You can even create empty tablatures by typing {guitartab: } or {basstab:
+ }.
+ Leave an empty line before the tab directive to make it start at the left
+ margin.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Between the brackets you can type</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>normal text (e.g. lyrics): it is printed under the
+ tablature</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>notes in the format [string;fret], e.g. [2;5] means fifth
+ fret on the A string</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>bars (by typing the | character)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>extra space between notes with the "_"
+ character</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <figure id="fig:tablature">
+ <title>Tablature icons</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/tablature.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ Instead of typing the lines by yourself, you can use the tablature icons
+ (see <xref linkend="fig:tablature"/>).
+ Clicking on the Guitar or Bass button inserts the directive at the cursor
+ position.
+ To insert a note, type the fret number into the input field and then ckick
+ on a button to choose a string. The note will be inserted at the cursor
+ position.
+ After this the focus comes back to the input field (not to the main text
+ field)
+ so you can enter several notes by always typing the fret number and
+ clicking
+ the string button.
+ </para>
+<section>
+
+<title>Examples</title>
+
+<example>
+<title>Empty guitar tablature</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat1.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tablature example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>A bass tab with some text</title>
+<programlisting>{basstab:some text}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat2.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tablature example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<example>
+<title>Typesetting notes, bars and extra spaces</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:[2;3][3;0][3;2][3;3]|[4;0]__[4;2]__[5;0]__[5;1]|}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat3.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tablature example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Putting text under the notes</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:[2;3]do [3;0]re [3;2]mi [3;3]fa |[4;0]so [4;2]la [5;0]si [5;1]do|}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat4.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tablature example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>A simple bass tab</title>
+<programlisting>{basstab:[2;5][2;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;7][3;7]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5]}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat5.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tablature example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Chords</title>
+<programlisting>{guitartab:[2;3]&[3;5]&[4;5]C (power chord) |[2;3]&[3;2]&[4;0]&[5;1]C chord}</programlisting>
+<para>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/tablat6.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Tablature example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+
+</section>
+
+ </section> <!--Tablature-->
+
+ <section id="others">
+ <title>Others</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>define</title>
+ <para>
+ With the define directive you can force GuitarTeX to print a chord
+ symbol at the
+ end of a song. The directive can be placed anywhere in the song.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The define directive has eight parameters:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>the chord name</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>the base fret</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>six fret values (an x means that the string isn't
+ played)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>define</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{define:A 1 x 0 2 2 2 0}
+{define:Cm 3 x 1 3 3 2 1}
+{define:Gm/Bb 4 3 2 2 1 x x}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>The result looks like <xref linkend="fig:chord"/>.</para>
+
+ <figure id="fig:chord">
+ <title>Chord example</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/chord-example.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>comment</title>
+ <para>The comment directive adds a text that isn't part of the
+ lyrics.</para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>comment</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{comment: repeat chorus}
+{c: repeat chorus}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>margin</title>
+ <para>
+ The margin directive creates a marginal note. You can use it to place
+ small
+ hints for the musician.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>margin</command></title>
+ <programlisting>{margin:Fade Out}
+{m:Fade Out}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>second</title>
+ <para>
+ In some pieces you find a second voice that not only has a
+ counter-melody, but
+ also different lyrics than the first voice. Well known examples are
+ "California Dreaming" from The Mamas And The Papas and
+ "Help" from the Beatles. If you mark the second voice with the
+ directive "second", it will appear white on gray background,
+ distinguishing it from the melody. Because of the use of proportional
+ fonts, you
+ may have to experiment a bit with the amount of spaces before the text
+ is
+ placed correctly.
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>Directive <command>second</command> (from Help!, The
+ Beatles)</title>
+ <programlisting>[G] When I was younger so much [Hm]younger than today
+{second:When when I was young}
+[Em] I never needed anybody's [C]help in [F]any [G]way
+{second:I never need help in any way}
+[G]But now these days are gone and I'm [Bm]not so self assured
+{second:Now these days are gone}
+[Em] Now I find I've changed my mind,
+{second:And now I find}
+I've [C]opened [F]up the [G]doors
+{second:I've opened up the doors}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+ </section>
+ </section> <!--Others-->
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="editor">
+ <title>Using the GuitarTeX editor</title>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Starting</title>
+
+ <para>To start the GuitarTeX editor just open a shell type the command
+ <command>guitartex</command></para>
+
+ </sect1> <!--Starting-->
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Menus</title>
+ <para>
+ You can tear off any menu by clicking on the first entry (-----). This is
+ may be usefull for the directives or the transpose menu as you don't
+ allways have to invoke the menu to use the provided commands.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="filemenu">
+ <title>File Menu</title>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>New, Open, Save, Save as, Quit</title>
+ <para>
+ The menu commands New, Open, Save, Save as and Quit behave like you
+ know from
+ other GUI-based applications. Therefor no further description is
+ needed. Instead
+ of using the menu you may click on one of the icons
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Export > LaTeX , Export > Postscript, Export > PDF</title>
+ <para>
+ The opened file will be saved and then converted to LaTeX , postscript
+ or PDF
+ format. The name of the resulting file is the original file name with
+ its
+ suffix changed to .tex, .ps or .pdf. Instead of using the menu you may
+ click on
+ one of the icons (see <xref linkend="fig:exporticons"/>).
+
+ <figure id="fig:exporticons">
+ <title>Icons to create LaTeX, postscript or PDF output</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/latex.png"/>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/postscript.png"/>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/pdf.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ After creating the exported file, a viewer is opened to show the
+ result.
+ You may use your favourite viewer by changing the parameters
+ <command>$text_viewer</command>, <command>$ps_viewer</command>
+ or <command>$pdf_viewer</command> in the configuration file
+ (see <xref linkend="configfile"/>).
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Edit Menu</title>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Cut, Copy, Paste</title>
+ <para>
+ If you want to cut, copy and paste parts of your text within your
+ document,
+ use the shortcuts ctrl-x (cut), ctrl-c (copy) and ctrl-v (paste).
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Insert File</title>
+ <para>
+ After invoking the Insert File command, a file selector will pop up.
+ The choosen
+ file will be inserted at the current cursor position.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="crd2chopro">
+ <title>crd -> chopro</title>
+ <para>
+ You will often find song files in raw ascii format instead of Chord
+ format.
+ The lines look like this:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>D A7 D
+I print verses in a row,
+ A7 D
+The next line gets put down below,
+ A7 D G G# A
+Mumble mumble rhymes with grow
+ A7susx
+Done this verse, now we go!</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ Place the cursor into the first line (the one with the chords) and
+ call the
+ crd->chopro command via menu or press the F9 key. The chord line and
+ the
+ following lyric line are converted into one line with Chord format.
+ The cursor
+ is placed in the next line. You only have to call the command (or
+ press the
+ F9 key) once again to continue converting the document.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Directives Menu</title>
+ <para>
+ With this menu you can insert directives. The directives are explained
+ in
+ <xref linkend="directives"/>.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Songbook Menu</title>
+ <para>
+ Insert all available songbook directives instead of typing them in. The
+ songbook
+ directives are explained in the <xref linkend="songbook"/>.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Colors Menu</title>
+ <para>
+ From this menu you can insert all available color directives. A color
+ selector
+ is opened (see figure <xref linkend="fig:color"/>).
+ </para>
+
+ <figure id="fig:color">
+ <title>Color selector</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/color_selector.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ You have three alternatives to select your favourite color:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>doubleclick on a predefined color in the list on the
+ left side of the color selector</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>move the sliders in the middle of the color selector
+ (you may like to choose RGB color space instead of HSB color space before
+ this)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>input RGB value into the input field called Name, not
+ really a good idea :-)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ The color directives may also be typed in manually.
+ They are explained in <xref linkend="color"/>.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="transpose">
+ <title>Transpose Menu</title>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Up, Down</title>
+
+ <para>
+ The Up/Down command will transpose the whole song by one halftone up
+ or down.
+ You may use the F5 and F6 keys instead of the menu. In slash chords
+ (e.g. G/B)
+ both the chord name and the bass note (behind the slash) are
+ transposed. Slashes
+ may only be used to write slash chords
+ (see <xref linkend="specialchar"/>).
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>b->#, #->b</title>
+ <para>
+ After transposing a song, the program doesn't know whether chords
+ should be
+ converted to flat or sharp notes. So all chords are written with
+ sharps if
+ necessary, e.g. C#. You can change them to flat, e.g. Db, and vice
+ versa
+ by using these commands. You may use the F7 and F8 keys instead of the
+ menu.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>B->H, H->B</title>
+ <para>
+ In german notation the note B is written as H. With these commands you
+ can
+ change B to H and vice versa.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Chord Icons</title>
+ <figure id="fig:icons">
+ <title>Chord icons</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/icons.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ By clicking on one of the chord icons (see <xref linkend="fig:icons"/>)
+ the chosen chord is inserted at the
+ current cursor position. After this you may edit the chord manually to
+ modify it
+ e.g. to a minor chord.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>Syntax Highlighting</title>
+ <figure id="fig:highlighting">
+ <title>Syntax Highlighting Icon</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/syntax.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ Since version 2.6 GuitarTeX provides syntax highlighting for directives,
+ comments and chords.
+ You can configure the foreground and background colors in the
+ configuration file.
+ If you insert directives or chords with the menus and icons, highlighting
+ is done automatically.
+ After typing directives or chords manually just click on the syntax
+ highlighting icon
+ (see <xref linkend="fig:highlighting"/>).
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="examples">
+ <title>Screenshots and examples</title>
+
+<section>
+<title>Main window</title>
+ <figure id="fig:mainwindow">
+ <title>Main window</title>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/window.png"/>
+ </figure>
+
+</section>
+
+
+<section>
+<title>Song sheets</title>
+
+<example>
+<title>Single song sheet</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/song.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Single song sheet</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Song sheet as part of a songbook</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/songbook.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Songbook page</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+</example>
+</section>
+
+<section>
+<title>Chord table</title>
+<para>
+The following chord table is a part of the author's personal songbook. It was
+created by the code below.</para>
+<example>
+<title>Chord table</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/chords.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Chord table</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>
+{title:D}
+{define:D 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D+ 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:D4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D6 1 x 0 0 2 0 2}
+{define:D7 1 x x 0 2 1 2}
+{define:D7#9 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D7(#9) 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D9 0 1 3 1 2 1 3}
+{define:D11 1 3 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:Dsus 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:Dsus2 1 0 0 0 2 3 0}
+{define:Dsus4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D7sus2 1 x 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:D7sus4 1 x 0 0 2 1 3}
+{define:Dmaj 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:Dmaj7 1 x x 0 2 2 2}
+{define:Ddim 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dmin 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:D/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/E 7 x 1 1 1 1 x}
+{define:D/G 1 3 x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D5/E 7 0 1 1 1 x x}
+{define:Dadd9 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D(add9) 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D9add6 0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+{define:D9(add6)0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+
+{define:Dm6(5b) 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm7 1 x x 0 2 1 1}
+{define:Dm#5 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm(#5) 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm#7 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm(#7) 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm(F) 1 x x 3 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm9 1 x x 3 2 1 0}
+</programlisting>
+</example>
+</section>
+
+<section>
+<title>Indexpage</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/index.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Index Page</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+</section>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="gtx2tex">
+ <title>Using the text filter gtx2tex</title>
+
+<para>
+If you don't want to use the GuitarTeX editor or you prefer
+to create the postscript or PDF output on a command line you may use
+gtx2tex
+</para>
+
+<refentry>
+
+<refmeta>
+<refentrytitle>gtx2tex</refentrytitle>
+</refmeta>
+
+<refnamediv>
+<refname>gtx2tex</refname>
+<refpurpose>converting chord files into TeX, postscript or PDF
+format</refpurpose> </refnamediv>
+
+<refsynopsisdiv>
+<synopsis>
+gtx2tex [--verbose] [--lyrics] [--output=ps|pdf] [--italian] <file>
+</synopsis>
+</refsynopsisdiv>
+
+<refsect1><title>Options</title>
+<para>
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>verbose</term>
+ <listitem><para>lets gtx2tex tell you what it is doing</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>lyrics</term>
+ <listitem><para>print only lyrics</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>output=ps|pdf</term>
+ <listitem><para>specify the output format; without the
+ output option a tex file is created</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>italian</term>
+ <listitem><para>chord output is changed into the Italian notation
+ (Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si)</para></listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+</para>
+</refsect1>
+
+</refentry>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC
+ "-//Norman Walsh//DTD DocBk XML V4.1.2//EN"
+ "/usr/share/sgml/db41xml/docbookx.dtd" [
+<!ENTITY info SYSTEM "info.xml">
+<!ENTITY intro SYSTEM "introduction.xml">
+<!ENTITY install SYSTEM "installation.xml">
+<!ENTITY gtx2tex SYSTEM "gtx2tex.xml">
+<!ENTITY editor SYSTEM "editor.xml">
+<!ENTITY directives SYSTEM "directives.xml">
+<!ENTITY latex SYSTEM "latex.xml">
+<!ENTITY examples SYSTEM "examples.xml">
+<!ENTITY links SYSTEM "links.xml">
+<!ENTITY acknowledgements SYSTEM "acknowledgements.xml">
+<!ENTITY sflogo SYSTEM "sflogo.xml">
+]>
+
+<book>
+ <title>GuitarTeX</title>
+
+ &info;
+ &intro;
+ &install;
+ >x2tex;
+ &editor;
+ &directives;
+ &latex;
+ &examples;
+ &links;
+
+ &acknowledgements;
+
+</book>
--- /dev/null
+book1.html
+introduction.html
+c87.html
+requirements.html
+installation.html
+configfile.html
+gtx2tex.html
+r205.html
+editor.html
+x246.html
+x318.html
+x325.html
+directives.html
+geometry.html
+x474.html
+x542.html
+songbook.html
+tablature.html
+others.html
+latex.html
+x782.html
+examples.html
+x858.html
+x886.html
+x903.html
+links.html
+x929.html
+a959.html
+ln12.html
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Acknowledgements</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Links"
+HREF="x929.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="appendix"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x929.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+> </TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="appendix"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN959"
+>Appendix A. Acknowledgements</A
+></H1
+><P
+></P
+><DIV
+CLASS="variablelist"
+><P
+><B
+>Thanks to ...</B
+></P
+><DL
+><DT
+>Lucio F. Albenga</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Spain for his translation to the Spanish language
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>David Cuny</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Canada for his help on the first
+ version of this document</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Brian Ewins</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Scottland for his Program PStab and the Manual
+ Song</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Bernhard Gröne</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Germany for sending me his songbook creating scripts
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Christoph Lange</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Germany for adding FindBin support
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Gary Lawrence Murphy</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Canada for his tips and testing on several
+ versions</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Pawel Pastula</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Poland for his translation to the Polish language
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Kasper Peeters</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from United Kingdom for allowing me to use the gchords package to display
+ chord symbols in LaTeX
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Marcelo Pereira</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Brazil for his translation to the Brazilian language
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Daniele Pighin</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from Italy for many suggestions and his translation to the
+ Italian language</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>Dan Polansky</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>from the Czech Republic for his program Chord
+ Pack</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>the people from Sourceforge.net and Freshmeat.net</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>for their great open source servers</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>all people from the open source community</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>who made Linux, KDE, LaTeX, MusixTeX,Perl and many other programs
+ I used to create GuitarTeX</P
+></DD
+></DL
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x929.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Links</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>GuitarTeX</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Introduction"
+HREF="introduction.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="book"
+><DIV
+CLASS="BOOK"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+></A
+><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="title"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>GuitarTeX</A
+></H1
+><H3
+CLASS="author"
+><A
+NAME="AEN4"
+>Joachim Miltz</A
+></H3
+><P
+CLASS="copyright"
+><A
+HREF="ln12.html"
+>Copyright</A
+> © 2000-2002 by Joachim Miltz</P
+><DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="abstract"
+><A
+NAME="AEN16"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><P
+> GuitarTeX is a tool for guitarists who want to print good looking and easy
+ to play song sheets or song books from their chord or chordpro files.
+ It uses the well known chord format with several extensions.
+ The program was developed on a Linux system, but it should run on any
+ other
+ Unix system with a Perl/TK environment.
+ See <A
+HREF="installation.html"
+>the Section called <I
+>Installing</I
+> in Chapter 2</A
+> for installing instructions and
+ <A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+>the Section called <I
+>Requirements</I
+> in Chapter 2</A
+> for further requirements.
+ </P
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+>1. <A
+HREF="introduction.html"
+>Introduction</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>2. <A
+HREF="c87.html"
+>Installation</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="c87.html#AEN89"
+>How to obtain GuitarTeX</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+>Requirements</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="installation.html"
+>Installing</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+>Configuration file</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>3. <A
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"
+>Using the text filter gtx2tex</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="r205.html"
+>gtx2tex</A
+> -- converting chord files into TeX, postscript or PDF
+format</DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>4. <A
+HREF="editor.html"
+>Using the GuitarTeX editor</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="editor.html#AEN242"
+>Starting</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html"
+>Menus</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html#filemenu"
+>File Menu</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html#AEN268"
+>Edit Menu</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html#AEN281"
+>Directives Menu</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html#AEN285"
+>Songbook Menu</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html#AEN289"
+>Colors Menu</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html#transpose"
+>Transpose Menu</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x318.html"
+>Chord Icons</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x325.html"
+>Syntax Highlighting</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>5. <A
+HREF="directives.html"
+>Supplied Chord directives</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="directives.html#specialchar"
+>Special Characters</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html"
+>Page Layout</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html#AEN368"
+>Layout Dimensions</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html#AEN374"
+>Option List</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html#AEN453"
+>Examples</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html"
+>Document Structure</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN476"
+>title</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN485"
+>subtitle</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN493"
+>sob, eob</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN504"
+>soc, eoc</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN515"
+>soi, eoi</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN521"
+>np</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN529"
+>sot, eot</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x542.html"
+>Fonts</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x542.html#AEN545"
+>font_size</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x542.html#color"
+>color_xxx</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+>Creating a Songbook</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN578"
+>document_class</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN600"
+>book_title, book_author, book_date</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN610"
+>chapter</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html#include"
+>include</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN627"
+>even</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN659"
+>Examples</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="others.html"
+>Others</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="others.html#AEN717"
+>define</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="others.html#AEN737"
+>comment</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="others.html#AEN744"
+>margin</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="others.html#AEN751"
+>second</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>6. <A
+HREF="latex.html"
+>Using LaTeX commands and packages</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="latex.html#AEN767"
+>Latex commands</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x782.html"
+>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x782.html#musixtex_examples"
+>Examples</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>7. <A
+HREF="examples.html"
+>Screenshots and examples</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="examples.html#AEN853"
+>Main window</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x858.html"
+>Song sheets</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x886.html"
+>Chord table</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x903.html"
+>Indexpage</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>8. <A
+HREF="links.html"
+>Related links</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="links.html#contacts"
+>Contacts</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x929.html"
+>Links</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x929.html#AEN931"
+>LaTeX</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x929.html#AEN937"
+>Perl</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x929.html#AEN943"
+>Guitar Sites</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>A. <A
+HREF="a959.html"
+>Acknowledgements</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="LOT"
+><DL
+CLASS="LOT"
+><DT
+><B
+>List of Tables</B
+></DT
+><DT
+>2-1. <A
+HREF="configfile.html#AEN130"
+>Configuration parameters</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-1. <A
+HREF="geometry.html#AEN376"
+>Options for <B
+CLASS="command"
+>geometry</B
+> directive</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="LOT"
+><DL
+CLASS="LOT"
+><DT
+><B
+>List of Figures</B
+></DT
+><DT
+>1-1. <A
+HREF="introduction.html#manualsong"
+>Print output from example file</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>4-1. <A
+HREF="x246.html#fig:exporticons"
+>Icons to create LaTeX, postscript or PDF output</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>4-2. <A
+HREF="x246.html#fig:color"
+>Color selector</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>4-3. <A
+HREF="x318.html#fig:icons"
+>Chord icons</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>4-4. <A
+HREF="x325.html#fig:highlighting"
+>Syntax Highlighting Icon</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-1. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#fig:tablature"
+>Tablature icons</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-2. <A
+HREF="others.html#fig:chord"
+>Chord example</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>7-1. <A
+HREF="examples.html#fig:mainwindow"
+>Main window</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="LOT"
+><DL
+CLASS="LOT"
+><DT
+><B
+>List of Examples</B
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-1. <A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN481"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>title</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-2. <A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN489"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>subtitle</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-3. <A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN499"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>sob</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eob</B
+>
+ (from Here, There And Everywhere, Beatles):</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-4. <A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN510"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>soc</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eoc</B
+>
+ (from With A Litle Help From My Friends, Beatles):</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-5. <A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN525"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>np</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-6. <A
+HREF="x474.html#AEN535"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>sot</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eot</B
+>
+ (from Pretty Woman, Roy Orbison):</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-7. <A
+HREF="x542.html#AEN548"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>font_size</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-8. <A
+HREF="x542.html#AEN571"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>color_chorus</B
+> (coloring the chorus
+ light blue):</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-9. <A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN586"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>document_class</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-10. <A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN603"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book_title</B
+>,
+ <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book_author</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book_date</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-11. <A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN614"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>chapter</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-12. <A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN622"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>include</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-13. <A
+HREF="songbook.html#AEN631"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>even</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-14. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN661"
+>Empty guitar tablature</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-15. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN670"
+>A bass tab with some text</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-16. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN679"
+>Typesetting notes, bars and extra spaces</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-17. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN688"
+>Putting text under the notes</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-18. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN697"
+>A simple bass tab</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-19. <A
+HREF="tablature.html#AEN706"
+>Chords</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-20. <A
+HREF="others.html#AEN728"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>define</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-21. <A
+HREF="others.html#AEN740"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>comment</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-22. <A
+HREF="others.html#AEN747"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>margin</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+>5-23. <A
+HREF="others.html#AEN754"
+>Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>second</B
+> (from Help!, The
+ Beatles)</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>6-1. <A
+HREF="latex.html#AEN771"
+>LaTeX command in chord file</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>6-2. <A
+HREF="latex.html#AEN777"
+>LaTeX command to be placed in the preamble</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>6-3. <A
+HREF="x782.html#AEN802"
+>MusixTeX</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>6-4. <A
+HREF="x782.html#AEN816"
+>Metronomic indication</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>6-5. <A
+HREF="x782.html#AEN830"
+>Enhanced lyrics typesetting with MusixLyr</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>7-1. <A
+HREF="x858.html#AEN860"
+>Single song sheet</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>7-2. <A
+HREF="x858.html#AEN873"
+>Song sheet as part of a songbook</A
+></DT
+><DT
+>7-3. <A
+HREF="x886.html#AEN889"
+>Chord table</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="introduction.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Introduction</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Installation</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Introduction"
+HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Requirements"
+HREF="requirements.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="introduction.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN87"
+>Chapter 2. Installation</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="c87.html#AEN89"
+>How to obtain GuitarTeX</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+>Requirements</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="installation.html"
+>Installing</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+>Configuration file</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN89"
+>How to obtain GuitarTeX</A
+></H1
+><P
+> The current version can be obtained from the GuitarTeX download page:
+ <A
+HREF="http://sf.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=13226"
+TARGET="_top"
+>http://sf.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=13226</A
+>.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="introduction.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Introduction</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Requirements</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Configuration file</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Installation"
+HREF="c87.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Installing"
+HREF="installation.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Using the text filter gtx2tex"
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="sect1"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="installation.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 2. Installation</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="configfile"
+>Configuration file</A
+></H1
+><P
+> GuitarTeX looks for a configuration file called .guitartexrc in your
+home directory.
+ Parameters are set in perl syntax, for example:
+ <TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>$language = "de";</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+>
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="table"
+><A
+NAME="AEN130"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Table 2-1. Configuration parameters</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><THEAD
+><TR
+><TH
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>parameter</TH
+><TH
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>meaning</TH
+></TR
+></THEAD
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>language</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>choose your favourite language</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>tool_tips</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>switch on or off tool tips for
+the icons</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>switch on or off syntax highlighting</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight_directive_foreground</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlighting foreground color for directives</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight_directive_background</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlighting background color for directives</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight_chord_foreground</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlighting foreground color for chords</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight_chord_background</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlighting background color for chords</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight_comment_foreground</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlighting foreground color for comments</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlight_comment_background</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>highlighting background color for comments</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>font_size</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default font size</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>color_chorus</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default color for chorus sections in printed
+ output</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>color_bridge</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default color for bridge sections in printed
+ output</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>color_instr</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default color for instrumental sections in printed
+ output</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>color_tab</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default color for ascii tablature sections in printed
+ output</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>color_second</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default foreground color for second voice sections in printed
+ output</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>color_second_back</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>default background color for second voice sections in printed
+ output</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>text_viewer</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>program to view the TeX file created by the export
+ function</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>ps_viewer</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>program to view the postscript file created by the export
+ function</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>pdf_viewer</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>program to view the PDF file created by the export
+ function</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="installation.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Installing</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Using the text filter gtx2tex</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Supplied Chord directives</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Syntax Highlighting"
+HREF="x325.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Page Layout"
+HREF="geometry.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x325.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="directives"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="directives.html#specialchar"
+>Special Characters</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html"
+>Page Layout</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x474.html"
+>Document Structure</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x542.html"
+>Fonts</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+>Creating a Songbook</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="others.html"
+>Others</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><P
+> Directives are Chord's commands between curly brackets {}, which control
+ the design of the produced output. Some often used directives can be
+ replaced
+ by a short cut (see examples). GuitarTeX provides some new directives
+ not known by the original Chord program.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="specialchar"
+>Special Characters</A
+></H1
+><P
+> In GuitarTeX some characters have a special meaning:
+ </P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+># at the beginning of a line marks the line as a comment.
+ The line is ignored by GuitarTeX</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>/ may only be used to write slash
+ chords (e.g. A/E)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x325.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Syntax Highlighting</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Page Layout</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+.NAVHEADER { display: none }
+.NAVFOOTER { display: none }
+.TOC { display: none }
+
+.NAVTOC { margin-left: 15;
+ display: none }
+
+.NAVBTN { font-size: 10pt }
+
+.TOCTITLE { font-size: 10pt;
+ color: blue;
+ text-decoration: underline; }
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Using the GuitarTeX editor</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="gtx2tex"
+HREF="r205.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Menus"
+HREF="x246.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="r205.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x246.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="editor"
+>Chapter 4. Using the GuitarTeX editor</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="editor.html#AEN242"
+>Starting</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x246.html"
+>Menus</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x318.html"
+>Chord Icons</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x325.html"
+>Syntax Highlighting</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN242"
+>Starting</A
+></H1
+><P
+>To start the GuitarTeX editor just open a shell type the command
+ <B
+CLASS="command"
+>guitartex</B
+></P
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="r205.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x246.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>gtx2tex</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Menus</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Screenshots and examples</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs"
+HREF="x782.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Song sheets"
+HREF="x858.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x782.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x858.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="examples"
+>Chapter 7. Screenshots and examples</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="examples.html#AEN853"
+>Main window</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x858.html"
+>Song sheets</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x886.html"
+>Chord table</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x903.html"
+>Indexpage</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN853"
+>Main window</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:mainwindow"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 7-1. Main window</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/window.png"></P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x782.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x858.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Song sheets</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Page Layout</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Document Structure"
+HREF="x474.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x474.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="geometry"
+>Page Layout</A
+></H1
+><P
+> The geometry directive provides an easy and flexible interface to
+ customize
+ page layout. It uses the LaTeX geometry package and it's description here
+ is a
+ (modified) part of the geometry package documentation.
+ </P
+><P
+> The geometry directive implements auto-centering and auto-balancing
+ mechanisms
+ so that the users have only to give the least description for the page
+ layout.
+ In this case, what you have to do is just
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:a4paper}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> In addition to this centering problem, setting margins from each edge of
+ the
+ paper is also troublesome. However, with geometry package, you can do
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:margin=1.5in}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> if you want to set each margin 1.5in from each edge of the paper.
+ </P
+><P
+> Lengths can be written in
+ </P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Centimeters (cm)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Millimeters (mm)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Inches (in)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Points (pt)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN368"
+>Layout Dimensions</A
+></H2
+><P
+> To realize a straightforward setting for page layout, the following page
+ structure is introduced: A paper contains a total body (printable area)
+ and
+ margins. The total body consists of a body (text area), a header, a
+ footer and a
+ marginal note which is optional. There are four margins: left-, right-,
+ top- and
+ bottom-margin.
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>paper: total-body (printable area) and margins
+total-body: head, body(text area), foot and marginal notes
+margins: left-, right-, top- and bottom-margin</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> Each margin is measured from the corresponding edge of a paper. For
+ example,
+ left-margin means a horizontal distance between the left edge of the
+ paper and
+ that of the total body. The dimensions for paper, totalbody and
+ margins have the following relations.
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>paperwidth = left + width + right
+paperheight = top + height + bottom</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN374"
+>Option List</A
+></H2
+><DIV
+CLASS="table"
+><A
+NAME="AEN376"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Table 5-1. Options for <B
+CLASS="command"
+>geometry</B
+> directive</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>landscape</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>switches the paper orientation to landscape mode</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>portrait</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>switches the paper orientation to portrait mode</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>twoside</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>switches on two-sided printing. In this mode, specified
+ left
+ and right margins are switched over in each odd-numbered
+ page.</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>reversemp</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>makes the marginal notes appear in the left margin</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>nohead</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>eliminates spaces for the head of page</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>nofoot</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>eliminates spaces for the foot of page</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>noheadfoot</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>eliminates spaces for the head and foot of page</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>a4paper, a5paper,letterpaper, legalpaper</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>specifies paper name. They must be used with no
+ values.</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>paperwidth</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>width of the paper. paperwidth=<paperwidth></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>paperheight</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>height of the paper.
+ paperheight=<paperheight></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>width</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>width of the total body. width=<width>or
+ totalwidth=<width>.
+ This dimension should not be confused with textwidth, because
+ width includes
+ the width of marginal notes</TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>height</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>height of the total body (including header and footer).
+ height=<height></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>left</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>left margin of the total body. In other words, the distance
+ between the
+ left edge of the paper and that of the total
+ body.left=<leftmargin></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>right</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>right margin of the total body.
+ right=<rightmargin></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>top</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>top margin of the total body. top=<topmargin></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>bottom</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>bottom margin of the total body.
+ bottom=<bottommargin></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>margin</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>sets all margins of the total body.
+ margin=<margin></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>textwidth</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies width of text (body).
+ textwidth=<width></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>textheight</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies height of text (body).
+ textheight=<height></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>marginpar</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies width of the marginal notes.
+ marginpar=<length></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>marginparsep</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies separation between body and marginal notes.
+ marginparsep=<length></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>head</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies height of header. head=<length></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>headsep</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies separation between header and text (body).
+ headsep=<length></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>foot</TD
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+>modifies distance separation between baseline of last line
+ of text and baseline of footer. foot=<length></TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN453"
+>Examples</A
+></H2
+><P
+> Set the height of the total body to be 10in, the bottom-margin 2cm,
+ and the width default. The top-margin will be calculated automatically:
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:height=10in,bottom=2cm}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+>or</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{g:height=10in,bottom=2cm}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+>or</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:height=10in}
+{g:bottom:=2cm}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> Set the left-, right-, and top-margin 3cm, 2cm and 2.5in respectively.
+ The page header is not used.
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:left=3cm,right=2cm, nohead,
+ top=2.5in}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+>or</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:left=3cm}
+{geometry:right=2cm}
+{geometry:nohead}
+{geometry:top=2.5in}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+>or</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{g:left=3cm,right=2cm}
+{g:nohead, top=2.5in}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+>and so on ...</P
+><P
+> Modify the width of marginal notes to 3cm and include marginal
+ notes when adjusting horizontal partition
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:marginpar=3cm}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:marginpar=3cm, reversemp}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+>makes the marginal notes appear in the left margin.</P
+><P
+>Use A5 paper in landscape mode.</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{geometry:a5paper, landscape}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x474.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Document Structure</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Using the text filter gtx2tex</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Configuration file"
+HREF="configfile.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="gtx2tex"
+HREF="r205.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="r205.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="gtx2tex"
+>Chapter 3. Using the text filter gtx2tex</A
+></H1
+><P
+> If you don't want to use the GuitarTeX editor or you prefer
+to create the postscript or PDF output on a command line you may use
+gtx2tex
+</P
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="r205.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Configuration file</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>gtx2tex</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Installing</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Installation"
+HREF="c87.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Requirements"
+HREF="requirements.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Configuration file"
+HREF="configfile.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="sect1"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 2. Installation</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="installation"
+>Installing</A
+></H1
+><P
+>To install GuitarTeX do the following:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>make sure that LaTeX, Perl and Perl/TK are installed
+ (see <A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+>the Section called <I
+>Requirements</I
+></A
+>)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>unpack the guitartex archive (for example
+ in your home directory)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>cd to the guitartex-x.x directory</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>run the following commands:
+ <P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>make conf (as normal user, this overwrites an existing
+ config file!)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>make install (as root)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>You may now delete the guitartex-x.x directory</P
+><P
+> "make conf" copies the configuration file into ~/.guitartexrc.
+ you may customize GuitarTeX by changing the configuration parameters
+ explained below.
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="requirements.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Requirements</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Configuration file</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Introduction</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Installation"
+HREF="c87.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="introduction"
+>Chapter 1. Introduction</A
+></H1
+><P
+> First of all: my written English isn't perfect, but I hope this text will
+ help you nevertheless! For suggestions see <A
+HREF="links.html#contacts"
+>the Section called <I
+>Contacts</I
+> in Chapter 8</A
+>..
+ </P
+><P
+> GuitarTeX is a tool for guitarists who want to print good looking
+and easy to play song sheets or song books from their chord or chordpro files.
+It uses the well known chord format with several extensions.
+</P
+><P
+> It is based upon an idea of Martin Leclerc and Mario Dorion from
+ Canada
+ and their program Chord (Version 3.5 from 1993). To use GuitarTeX, you
+ need
+ to have knowledge of the Chord program (explained later). Though the LaTeX
+ text processing system is used by GuitarTeX, you don't have to know very
+ much
+ about it. GuitarTeX produces Postscript or PDF output automatically (if
+ you
+ want). The Chord directives supplied by GuitarTeX are described in
+ <A
+HREF="directives.html"
+>Chapter 5</A
+>.
+ </P
+><P
+></P
+><P
+><B
+>Features</B
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Graphical user interface with integrated editor and syntax
+highlighting</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Prints good looking song sheets including
+guitar chords without using monospace fonts</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Output formats: LaTeX, Postscript and PDF</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Compatible with ChordPro format, import function for ascii
+ format</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for music typesetting with the LaTeX packages
+MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Flexible page
+layout (paper size, margins...)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> User defined
+colors for different parts of a song (e.g. verse, chorus)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Optional printing of chord symbols at the end of a
+ song</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Transpose up or down your song by mouse
+ clicks</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Creates single song sheets or complete song books with a title
+ page,
+ table of contents, headlines with page numbering, chord table and
+ index</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Supports ASCII tablature and the built in tablature directives
+ for
+ guitar
+ and bass tabs</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Support for multiple languages (if you don't find your
+ langauage, you
+ can
+ help the author to add it)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Runs on Linux operating system (it should run on any Unix
+ system that
+ is
+ supported by Perl/TK and LaTeX, but it is not tested)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Setup your song book project from single song files with the
+ include
+ directive</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> LaTeX commands may be used in Chordpro files (for the
+ professionals)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+> GuitarTeX converts a file with lyrics and chords in a special format to a
+ LaTeX file. Here is an example input file:
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.
+
+{c:repeat chorus}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> The ^-sign is new for users of other Chord clones.
+ It makes the following characters appear superscript.
+ You can see the output in <A
+HREF="introduction.html#manualsong"
+>Figure 1-1</A
+>.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="manualsong"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 1-1. Print output from example file</B
+></P
+><DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN72"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/manualsong.png"></P
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><P
+> GuitarTeX converts the Chord format into "normal" LaTeX format like a kind
+ of preprocessor. This may be a single song or even a complete songbook.
+ You may as well translate your chord file directly into postscript or PDF
+ format.
+ </P
+><P
+> If you know LaTeX, you may edit the output file. The advantage of
+ GuitarTeX is that you can use all LaTeX features to design a single song
+ sheet or songbook, e.g.: packages like graphics or MusicTeX, table of
+ contents, marginal notes, and so on.
+ </P
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>GuitarTeX</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Installation</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Using LaTeX commands and packages</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Others"
+HREF="others.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs"
+HREF="x782.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="others.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x782.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="latex"
+>Chapter 6. Using LaTeX commands and packages</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="latex.html#AEN767"
+>Latex commands</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x782.html"
+>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN767"
+>Latex commands</A
+></H1
+><P
+> As I mentioned in the introduction, you don't have to know very
+ much about LaTeX to use GuitarTeX. You can use it even if you don't know
+ anything about LaTeX.
+ </P
+><P
+> If you are familiar with LaTeX you can use any feature of it to improve your
+ song sheet or book. All lines of your chord file that begin with a backslash
+ will be left untouched by GuitarTeX. You may test this by inserting a simple
+ LaTeX command like this:
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN771"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 6-1. LaTeX command in chord file</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>\marginpar{test}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>The result will be a marginal note with the word test.</P
+><P
+> The LaTeX commands will be executed at the position they appear in the chord
+ file.
+ But sometimes you may want to add a command to the preamble, e.g. to include
+ other
+ LaTeX packages. This can be done using the <B
+CLASS="command"
+>preamble</B
+>
+ directive:
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN777"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 6-2. LaTeX command to be placed in the preamble</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{preamble:\usepackage(fancyheadings)}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+> The <B
+CLASS="command"
+>preamble</B
+> directives may occur anywhere in your song.
+ They are added to the LaTeX preamble in the same order they appear in the
+ chord file.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="others.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x782.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Others</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Related links</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Indexpage"
+HREF="x903.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Links"
+HREF="x929.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="chapter"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x903.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x929.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="chapter"
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="links"
+>Chapter 8. Related links</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="links.html#contacts"
+>Contacts</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="x929.html"
+>Links</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="contacts"
+>Contacts</A
+></H1
+><P
+> To contact the author or other GuitarTeX users use
+ the mailing list: <A
+HREF="http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/guitartex-users"
+TARGET="_top"
+>http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/guitartex-users</A
+>
+ </P
+></DIV
+><P
+>hosted by
+<A
+HREF="http://sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Sourceforge.net
+<SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1.gif"
+ALT="SourceForge Logo"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</A
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x903.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x929.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Indexpage</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Links</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Introduction"
+HREF="introduction.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="legalnotice"
+><A
+NAME="AEN12"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><P
+> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+ under
+ the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+ Software
+ Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
+ version.
+ </P
+><P
+> This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ WITHOUT
+ ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+ FITNESS
+ FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
+ details.
+ </P
+><P
+> You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ with
+ this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675
+ Mass
+ Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+ </P
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+> </TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Others</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Guitar and Bass Tablatures"
+HREF="tablature.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Using LaTeX commands and packages"
+HREF="latex.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="latex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="others"
+>Others</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN717"
+>define</A
+></H2
+><P
+> With the define directive you can force GuitarTeX to print a chord
+ symbol at the
+ end of a song. The directive can be placed anywhere in the song.
+ </P
+><P
+>The define directive has eight parameters:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>the chord name</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>the base fret</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>six fret values (an x means that the string isn't
+ played)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN728"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-20. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>define</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{define:A 1 x 0 2 2 2 0}
+{define:Cm 3 x 1 3 3 2 1}
+{define:Gm/Bb 4 3 2 2 1 x x}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>The result looks like <A
+HREF="others.html#fig:chord"
+>Figure 5-2</A
+>.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:chord"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 5-2. Chord example</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/chord-example.png"></P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN737"
+>comment</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The comment directive adds a text that isn't part of the
+ lyrics.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN740"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-21. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>comment</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{comment: repeat chorus}
+{c: repeat chorus}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN744"
+>margin</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The margin directive creates a marginal note. You can use it to place
+ small
+ hints for the musician.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN747"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-22. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>margin</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{margin:Fade Out}
+{m:Fade Out}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN751"
+>second</A
+></H2
+><P
+> In some pieces you find a second voice that not only has a
+ counter-melody, but
+ also different lyrics than the first voice. Well known examples are
+ "California Dreaming" from The Mamas And The Papas and
+ "Help" from the Beatles. If you mark the second voice with the
+ directive "second", it will appear white on gray background,
+ distinguishing it from the melody. Because of the use of proportional
+ fonts, you
+ may have to experiment a bit with the amount of spaces before the text
+ is
+ placed correctly.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN754"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-23. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>second</B
+> (from Help!, The
+ Beatles)</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>[G] When I was younger so much [Hm]younger than today
+{second:When when I was young}
+[Em] I never needed anybody's [C]help in [F]any [G]way
+{second:I never need help in any way}
+[G]But now these days are gone and I'm [Bm]not so self assured
+{second:Now these days are gone}
+[Em] Now I find I've changed my mind,
+{second:And now I find}
+I've [C]opened [F]up the [G]doors
+{second:I've opened up the doors}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="latex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Using LaTeX commands and packages</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>gtx2tex</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Using the text filter gtx2tex"
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Using the text filter gtx2tex"
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Using the GuitarTeX editor"
+HREF="editor.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="refentry"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN205"
+>gtx2tex</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="refnamediv"
+><A
+NAME="AEN208"
+></A
+><H2
+>Name</H2
+>gtx2tex -- converting chord files into TeX, postscript or PDF
+format</DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="refsynopsisdiv"
+><A
+NAME="AEN211"
+></A
+><H2
+>Synopsis</H2
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="synopsis"
+> gtx2tex [--verbose] [--lyrics] [--output=ps|pdf] [--italian] <file>
+</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="refsect1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN213"
+></A
+><H2
+>Options</H2
+><P
+> <P
+></P
+><DIV
+CLASS="variablelist"
+><DL
+><DT
+>verbose</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>lets gtx2tex tell you what it is doing</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>lyrics</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>print only lyrics</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>output=ps|pdf</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>specify the output format; without the
+ output option a tex file is created</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>italian</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>chord output is changed into the Italian notation
+ (Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si)</P
+></DD
+></DL
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Using the text filter gtx2tex</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="gtx2tex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Using the GuitarTeX editor</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Requirements</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Installation"
+HREF="c87.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Installation"
+HREF="c87.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Installing"
+HREF="installation.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="sect1"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 2. Installation</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="installation.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="requirements"
+>Requirements</A
+></H1
+><P
+> GuitarTeX was created under Linux operating system.
+ It should run with any Linux dristribution and also on any other Unix
+ system. In addition it requires
+
+
+<P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>LaTeX</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Perl</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Perl/TK</P
+></LI
+></UL
+>
+
+to be installed on your system.To create pdf output, your LaTeX distribution
+should also include
+
+<P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>pdflatex</P
+></LI
+></UL
+>
+
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="installation.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Installation</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="c87.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Installing</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Creating a Songbook</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Fonts"
+HREF="x542.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Guitar and Bass Tablatures"
+HREF="tablature.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x542.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="songbook"
+>Creating a Songbook</A
+></H1
+><P
+> The document_class and book_... directives can be placed anywhere in the
+ Chord file, though it is usefull to place them at the beginning :-).
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN578"
+>document_class</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The document_class directive specifies the type of document you get.
+ There are two possible values:
+ </P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>book</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>article (default if not specified)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN586"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-9. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>document_class</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{document_class:book}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>The value book produces</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>a title page</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>a table of contents</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>headlines with page numbers</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>an index</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN600"
+>book_title, book_author, book_date</A
+></H2
+><P
+>These three directives describe the content of the title
+ page.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN603"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-10.
+ Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book_title</B
+>,
+ <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book_author</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book_date</B
+>
+ </B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{book_title:My Favourite Songs}
+{book_author:My Name}
+{book_date:September 2000}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+> The value given in the book_title directive appears
+ in the headlines on even pages.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN610"
+>chapter</A
+></H2
+><P
+> If the document_class is <B
+CLASS="command"
+>book</B
+>, you can section
+ the document with the chapter directive. A chapter title page is
+ inserted at the occurance of the directive.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN614"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-11. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>chapter</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{chapter:Beatles}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+> The chapter name appears in the table of contents and also
+ in the headlines on odd pages.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="include"
+>include</A
+></H2
+><P
+> If you have a collection of chord files you may want to create a
+ songbook (or
+ even several different songbooks) without merging all songs to one
+ single file.
+ Merging all files has some disadvantages, e.g. transposing one single
+ song is
+ no longer possible. With the include directive you may leave all files
+ as they
+ are. Just create a songbook file and include the files you want.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN622"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-12. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>include</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{document_class:book}
+{book_title:}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 1}
+{include:song file 1}
+{include:song file 2}
+{chapter:Name of chapter 2}
+{include:song file 3}
+{include:song file 4}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>In the example four song files are merged to a songbook with two
+ chapters.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN627"
+>even</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>even</B
+> makes the piece begin on the next
+ left
+ page. In a book this is useful for preventing a page turn in an two-page
+ piece.
+ The directive must be placed before the title directive in order to work
+ correctly.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN631"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-13. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>even</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{even}
+{title:Proud Mary}
+{st:Creedence Clearwater Revival 1972}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x542.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Fonts</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Creating a Songbook"
+HREF="songbook.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Others"
+HREF="others.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="others.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="tablature"
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</A
+></H1
+><P
+>GuitarTeX knows two new directives for printing tablature
+ lines:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>{guitartab: } for guitar tablatures</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>{basstab: } for bass tablatures</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+> Every guitartab or basstab directive represents one line of tablature.
+ You can even create empty tablatures by typing {guitartab: } or {basstab:
+ }.
+ Leave an empty line before the tab directive to make it start at the left
+ margin.
+ </P
+><P
+>Between the brackets you can type</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>normal text (e.g. lyrics): it is printed under the
+ tablature</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>notes in the format [string;fret], e.g. [2;5] means fifth
+ fret on the A string</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>bars (by typing the | character)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>extra space between notes with the "_"
+ character</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:tablature"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 5-1. Tablature icons</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablature.png"></P
+></DIV
+><P
+> Instead of typing the lines by yourself, you can use the tablature icons
+ (see <A
+HREF="tablature.html#fig:tablature"
+>Figure 5-1</A
+>).
+ Clicking on the Guitar or Bass button inserts the directive at the cursor
+ position.
+ To insert a note, type the fret number into the input field and then ckick
+ on a button to choose a string. The note will be inserted at the cursor
+ position.
+ After this the focus comes back to the input field (not to the main text
+ field)
+ so you can enter several notes by always typing the fret number and
+ clicking
+ the string button.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN659"
+>Examples</A
+></H2
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN661"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-14. Empty guitar tablature</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{guitartab:}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablat1.png"
+ALT="Tablature example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN670"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-15. A bass tab with some text</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{basstab:some text}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablat2.png"
+ALT="Tablature example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN679"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-16. Typesetting notes, bars and extra spaces</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{guitartab:[2;3][3;0][3;2][3;3]|[4;0]__[4;2]__[5;0]__[5;1]|}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablat3.png"
+ALT="Tablature example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN688"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-17. Putting text under the notes</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{guitartab:[2;3]do [3;0]re [3;2]mi [3;3]fa |[4;0]so [4;2]la [5;0]si [5;1]do|}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablat4.png"
+ALT="Tablature example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN697"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-18. A simple bass tab</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{basstab:[2;5][2;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5][2;5]|[3;7][3;7]|[3;5][3;5]|[2;5]}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablat5.png"
+ALT="Tablature example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN706"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-19. Chords</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{guitartab:[2;3]&[3;5]&[4;5]C (power chord) |[2;3]&[3;2]&[4;0]&[5;1]C chord}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/tablat6.png"
+ALT="Tablature example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="others.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Creating a Songbook</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Others</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Menus</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Using the GuitarTeX editor"
+HREF="editor.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Using the GuitarTeX editor"
+HREF="editor.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Chord Icons"
+HREF="x318.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="sect1"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 4. Using the GuitarTeX editor</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x318.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN246"
+>Menus</A
+></H1
+><P
+> You can tear off any menu by clicking on the first entry (-----). This is
+ may be usefull for the directives or the transpose menu as you don't
+ allways have to invoke the menu to use the provided commands.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect2"
+><H2
+CLASS="sect2"
+><A
+NAME="filemenu"
+>File Menu</A
+></H2
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN251"
+>New, Open, Save, Save as, Quit</A
+></H3
+><P
+> The menu commands New, Open, Save, Save as and Quit behave like you
+ know from
+ other GUI-based applications. Therefor no further description is
+ needed. Instead
+ of using the menu you may click on one of the icons
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN254"
+>Export > LaTeX , Export > Postscript, Export > PDF</A
+></H3
+><P
+> The opened file will be saved and then converted to LaTeX , postscript
+ or PDF
+ format. The name of the resulting file is the original file name with
+ its
+ suffix changed to .tex, .ps or .pdf. Instead of using the menu you may
+ click on
+ one of the icons (see <A
+HREF="x246.html#fig:exporticons"
+>Figure 4-1</A
+>).
+
+ <DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:exporticons"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 4-1. Icons to create LaTeX, postscript or PDF output</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/latex.png"></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/postscript.png"></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/pdf.png"></P
+></DIV
+>
+
+ </P
+><P
+> After creating the exported file, a viewer is opened to show the
+ result.
+ You may use your favourite viewer by changing the parameters
+ <B
+CLASS="command"
+>$text_viewer</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>$ps_viewer</B
+>
+ or <B
+CLASS="command"
+>$pdf_viewer</B
+> in the configuration file
+ (see <A
+HREF="configfile.html"
+>the Section called <I
+>Configuration file</I
+> in Chapter 2</A
+>).
+ </P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect2"
+><H2
+CLASS="sect2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN268"
+>Edit Menu</A
+></H2
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN270"
+>Cut, Copy, Paste</A
+></H3
+><P
+> If you want to cut, copy and paste parts of your text within your
+ document,
+ use the shortcuts ctrl-x (cut), ctrl-c (copy) and ctrl-v (paste).
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN273"
+>Insert File</A
+></H3
+><P
+> After invoking the Insert File command, a file selector will pop up.
+ The choosen
+ file will be inserted at the current cursor position.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="crd2chopro"
+>crd -> chopro</A
+></H3
+><P
+> You will often find song files in raw ascii format instead of Chord
+ format.
+ The lines look like this:
+ </P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>D A7 D
+I print verses in a row,
+ A7 D
+The next line gets put down below,
+ A7 D G G# A
+Mumble mumble rhymes with grow
+ A7susx
+Done this verse, now we go!</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><P
+> Place the cursor into the first line (the one with the chords) and
+ call the
+ crd->chopro command via menu or press the F9 key. The chord line and
+ the
+ following lyric line are converted into one line with Chord format.
+ The cursor
+ is placed in the next line. You only have to call the command (or
+ press the
+ F9 key) once again to continue converting the document.
+ </P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect2"
+><H2
+CLASS="sect2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN281"
+>Directives Menu</A
+></H2
+><P
+> With this menu you can insert directives. The directives are explained
+ in
+ <A
+HREF="directives.html"
+>Chapter 5</A
+>.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect2"
+><H2
+CLASS="sect2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN285"
+>Songbook Menu</A
+></H2
+><P
+> Insert all available songbook directives instead of typing them in. The
+ songbook
+ directives are explained in the <A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+>the Section called <I
+>Creating a Songbook</I
+> in Chapter 5</A
+>.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect2"
+><H2
+CLASS="sect2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN289"
+>Colors Menu</A
+></H2
+><P
+> From this menu you can insert all available color directives. A color
+ selector
+ is opened (see figure <A
+HREF="x246.html#fig:color"
+>Figure 4-2</A
+>).
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:color"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 4-2. Color selector</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/color_selector.png"></P
+></DIV
+><P
+> You have three alternatives to select your favourite color:
+ </P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>doubleclick on a predefined color in the list on the
+ left side of the color selector</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>move the sliders in the middle of the color selector
+ (you may like to choose RGB color space instead of HSB color space before
+ this)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>input RGB value into the input field called Name, not
+ really a good idea :-)</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+> The color directives may also be typed in manually.
+ They are explained in <A
+HREF="x542.html#color"
+>the Section called <I
+>color_xxx</I
+> in Chapter 5</A
+>.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect2"
+><H2
+CLASS="sect2"
+><A
+NAME="transpose"
+>Transpose Menu</A
+></H2
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN308"
+>Up, Down</A
+></H3
+><P
+> The Up/Down command will transpose the whole song by one halftone up
+ or down.
+ You may use the F5 and F6 keys instead of the menu. In slash chords
+ (e.g. G/B)
+ both the chord name and the bass note (behind the slash) are
+ transposed. Slashes
+ may only be used to write slash chords
+ (see <A
+HREF="directives.html#specialchar"
+>the Section called <I
+>Special Characters</I
+> in Chapter 5</A
+>).
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN312"
+>b->#, #->b</A
+></H3
+><P
+> After transposing a song, the program doesn't know whether chords
+ should be
+ converted to flat or sharp notes. So all chords are written with
+ sharps if
+ necessary, e.g. C#. You can change them to flat, e.g. Db, and vice
+ versa
+ by using these commands. You may use the F7 and F8 keys instead of the
+ menu.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect3"
+><H3
+CLASS="sect3"
+><A
+NAME="AEN315"
+>B->H, H->B</A
+></H3
+><P
+> In german notation the note B is written as H. With these commands you
+ can
+ change B to H and vice versa.
+ </P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x318.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Using the GuitarTeX editor</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Chord Icons</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Chord Icons</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Using the GuitarTeX editor"
+HREF="editor.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Menus"
+HREF="x246.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Syntax Highlighting"
+HREF="x325.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="sect1"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x246.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 4. Using the GuitarTeX editor</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x325.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN318"
+>Chord Icons</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:icons"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 4-3. Chord icons</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/icons.png"></P
+></DIV
+><P
+> By clicking on one of the chord icons (see <A
+HREF="x318.html#fig:icons"
+>Figure 4-3</A
+>)
+ the chosen chord is inserted at the
+ current cursor position. After this you may edit the chord manually to
+ modify it
+ e.g. to a minor chord.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x246.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x325.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Menus</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Syntax Highlighting</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Syntax Highlighting</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Using the GuitarTeX editor"
+HREF="editor.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Chord Icons"
+HREF="x318.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="sect1"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x318.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 4. Using the GuitarTeX editor</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="sect1"
+><H1
+CLASS="sect1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN325"
+>Syntax Highlighting</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="figure"
+><A
+NAME="fig:highlighting"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Figure 4-4. Syntax Highlighting Icon</B
+></P
+><P
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/syntax.png"></P
+></DIV
+><P
+> Since version 2.6 GuitarTeX provides syntax highlighting for directives,
+ comments and chords.
+ You can configure the foreground and background colors in the
+ configuration file.
+ If you insert directives or chords with the menus and icons, highlighting
+ is done automatically.
+ After typing directives or chords manually just click on the syntax
+ highlighting icon
+ (see <A
+HREF="x325.html#fig:highlighting"
+>Figure 4-4</A
+>).
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x318.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Chord Icons</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="editor.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Supplied Chord directives</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Document Structure</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Page Layout"
+HREF="geometry.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Fonts"
+HREF="x542.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x542.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN474"
+>Document Structure</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN476"
+>title</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The title of a piece of music is marked by the directive
+ <B
+CLASS="command"
+>title</B
+>.
+ The title is printed centered with a larger font. In documents with more
+ than
+ one piece, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>title</B
+> causes a page break.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN481"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-1. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>title</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{title:Go Down Moses}
+{t:Go Down Moses}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN485"
+>subtitle</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>subtitle</B
+> supplies additional
+ information, such as the name of the band or the composer.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN489"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-2. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>subtitle</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{subtitle:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}
+{st:written by John Lennon / Paul McCartney}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN493"
+>sob, eob</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The bridge is marked with <B
+CLASS="command"
+>sob</B
+> (start of bridge) at
+ the beginning,
+ and <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eob</B
+> (end of bridge) at the end. The bridge is
+ output
+ in blue if you use a color printer. The color can be changed by the
+ <B
+CLASS="command"
+>color_bridge</B
+> directive.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN499"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-3. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>sob</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eob</B
+>
+ (from Here, There And Everywhere, Beatles):</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{sob}
+I want her [Ab]everywhere [Fm]
+And if [Bbm]she's beside me [C^7]I know I need [Fm]never care
+[Bb]But to love her [C^7]is to meet her
+{eob}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN504"
+>soc, eoc</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The chorus is marked with <B
+CLASS="command"
+>soc</B
+> (start of chorus) at
+ the beginning,
+ and <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eoc</B
+> (end of chorus) the end. The chorus is output
+ in
+ red if you use a color printer. The color can be changed by the
+ color_chorus
+ directive (see <A
+HREF="x542.html#color"
+>the Section called <I
+>color_xxx</I
+></A
+>).
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN510"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-4. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>soc</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eoc</B
+>
+ (from With A Litle Help From My Friends, Beatles):</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{soc}
+Oh, I get [C]by with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Mm, I get [C]high with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+Oh, I'm gonna [C]try with a little [G]help from my [D]friends
+{eoc}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN515"
+>soi, eoi</A
+></H2
+><P
+> An instrumental part is marked with <B
+CLASS="command"
+>soi</B
+> (start of
+ instrumental)
+ at the beginning, and <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eoi</B
+> (end of instrumental) the
+ end.
+ The instrumental part is output in grey if you use a color printer. The
+ color
+ can be changed by the <B
+CLASS="command"
+>color_instr</B
+> directive.
+ </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN521"
+>np</A
+></H2
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="command"
+>np</B
+> stands for new page and creates a page
+ break.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN525"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-5. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>np</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{np}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN529"
+>sot, eot</A
+></H2
+><P
+> Tablature is marked with <B
+CLASS="command"
+>sot</B
+> (start of tablature) at
+ the
+ beginning, and <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eot</B
+> (end of tablature) the end.
+ Tablature
+ output in green if you use a color printer. The color can be changed by
+ the
+ color_tab directive (see <A
+HREF="x542.html#color"
+>the Section called <I
+>color_xxx</I
+></A
+>).
+ The tablature is output in a non-proportional font.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN535"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-6. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>sot</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="command"
+>eot</B
+>
+ (from Pretty Woman, Roy Orbison):</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{sot}
+E ---------------------|------------------------------------
+B ---------------------|------------------------------------
+G ---------------------|------------------------------------
+D -----------------0---|-------------------0---4---2---0----
+A -------------2-------|---------------2--------------------
+E -0---0---4-----------|---0---0---4------------------------
+{eot}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+> If you don't like ascii tablatures and you look for a way to create
+ tablatures
+ more easily, see <A
+HREF="tablature.html"
+>the Section called <I
+>Guitar and Bass Tablatures</I
+></A
+>.
+ </P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="geometry.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x542.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Page Layout</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Fonts</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Fonts</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Supplied Chord directives"
+HREF="directives.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Document Structure"
+HREF="x474.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Creating a Songbook"
+HREF="songbook.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x474.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 5. Supplied Chord directives</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN542"
+>Fonts</A
+></H1
+><P
+> The font and color directives can be placed anywhere in the Chord file,
+ though
+ it is usefull to place them at the beginning :-). The specified values are
+ valid
+ for the whole document!
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN545"
+>font_size</A
+></H2
+><P
+> LaTeX allows the three font sizes 10pt, 11pt and 12pt. GuitarTeX sets
+ the default value to 11pt (titles and subtitles are enlarged
+ automatically). If
+ you want a font size of 12pt you should write:
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN548"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-7. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>font_size</B
+></B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{font_size:12}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>Note: do not write 12pt instead of 12!</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="color"
+>color_xxx</A
+></H2
+><P
+> The color directives allow to change the text color of the chorus,
+ bridge,
+ instrumental parts, tablatures and a second voice. For the second voice
+ even the
+ background color may be specified. So you can write white letters on a
+ colored
+ background for example. This will help the singers not getting confused
+ by many
+ lyrics lines :-)
+ </P
+><P
+>The directives are named</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>color_chorus</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>color_bridge</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>color_instr</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>color_tab</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>color_second</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>color_second_back</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+> The parameters must be a comma separated list of three numbers between 0
+ and
+ 1, giving the red, green and blue components of the color.
+ </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN571"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 5-8. Directive <B
+CLASS="command"
+>color_chorus</B
+> (coloring the chorus
+ light blue):</B
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{color_chorus:.5,.5,1}</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x474.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="songbook.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Document Structure</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="directives.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Creating a Songbook</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Using LaTeX commands and packages"
+HREF="latex.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Using LaTeX commands and packages"
+HREF="latex.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Screenshots and examples"
+HREF="examples.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="latex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 6. Using LaTeX commands and packages</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN782"
+>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</A
+></H1
+><P
+>MusixTeX is a powerfull LaTeX package for music typesetting.MusixLyr
+and TabDefs are additional LaTeX packages to improve lyrics and tablature
+typesetting with MusixTeX. You may use these packages within GuitarTeX by
+including one (or more) of the following directives (anywhere in your Chord
+file):
+</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>{musixtex}</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>{musixlyr}</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>{tabdefs}</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><DIV
+CLASS="important"
+><BLOCKQUOTE
+CLASS="important"
+><P
+><B
+>Important: </B
+>
+You must have installed the packages correctly before you may use them in GuitarTeX!
+Please read the documentation that comes with the packages.
+</P
+></BLOCKQUOTE
+></DIV
+><P
+> After this you may use LaTeX code for MusixTeX, MusixLyr or TabDefs at any place
+in your Chord file or better include them using the include directive
+(for Examples see <A
+HREF="x782.html#musixtex_examples"
+>the Section called <I
+>Examples</I
+></A
+>).
+</P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="sidebar"
+BORDER="1"
+CELLPADDING="5"
+><TR
+><TD
+><DIV
+CLASS="sidebar"
+><A
+NAME="AEN796"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>
+By the way: please pay attention to the first words of the MusixTeX manual:
+
+</B
+></P
+><P
+> "If you are not familiar with TeX at all I would recommend to find another
+software package to do musical typesetting.Setting up TeX and MusiTeX on your
+machine and mastering it is an awesome job which gobbles up a lot of your time
+and disk space. But, once you master it..."
+</P
+><P
+> So you will understand that the Author of GuitarTeX cannot give
+any support for installing or using MusixTeX, MusixLyr or TabDefs.
+</P
+></DIV
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="musixtex_examples"
+>Examples</A
+></H2
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN802"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 6-3. MusixTeX</B
+></P
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN805"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/musixtex1.png"
+ALT="MusixTeX example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{musixtex}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\hsize=100mm
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
+\parindent 0pt
+\setsign1{-3}
+\startpiece\bigaccid
+\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
+\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
+\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
+\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
+\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
+\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
+\setdoubleBAR
+\stoppiece
+\bigskip
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN816"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 6-4. Metronomic indication</B
+></P
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN819"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/musixtex2.png"
+ALT="Metronomic indication"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{musixtex}
+{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+
+\notes\metron{\qu}{60}\en
+
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN830"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 6-5. Enhanced lyrics typesetting with MusixLyr</B
+></P
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN833"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/musixlyr1.png"
+ALT="MusixLyr example"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+>{musixtex}
+{musixlyr}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\par{
+\hsize=120mm
+\setlyrstrut
+\resetlyrics
+\setlyrics{Winter1}{Win-ter a-de\rlap{,} a-ber dein Schei-den macht\rlap{,}}
+\setlyrics{Winter2}{schei-den tut weh\rlap,}
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1,Winter2}
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
+\generalsignature2
+\setsongraise1{-2mm}
+\startpiece
+\NOtes\qa{ffe}\en\bar
+\NOTesp\hup d\en\rightrepeat
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1}%
+\NOtes\qa{fgh}\en\bar
+\NOtes\qa h\en
+\Notes\beginmel\Ibu0gf1\qb0g\endmel\tqh0f\en
+\NOtes\qa g\en
+\endpiece
+}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="latex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Using LaTeX commands and packages</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="latex.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Screenshots and examples</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Song sheets</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Screenshots and examples"
+HREF="examples.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Screenshots and examples"
+HREF="examples.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Chord table"
+HREF="x886.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 7. Screenshots and examples</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x886.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN858"
+>Song sheets</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN860"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 7-1. Single song sheet</B
+></P
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN863"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/song.png"
+ALT="Single song sheet"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN873"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 7-2. Song sheet as part of a songbook</B
+></P
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN876"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/songbook.png"
+ALT="Songbook page"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x886.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Screenshots and examples</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Chord table</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Chord table</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Screenshots and examples"
+HREF="examples.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Song sheets"
+HREF="x858.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Indexpage"
+HREF="x903.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x858.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 7. Screenshots and examples</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x903.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN886"
+>Chord table</A
+></H1
+><P
+> The following chord table is a part of the author's personal songbook. It was
+created by the code below.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="example"
+><A
+NAME="AEN889"
+></A
+><P
+><B
+>Example 7-3. Chord table</B
+></P
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN892"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/chords.png"
+ALT="Chord table"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="0"
+BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+><PRE
+CLASS="programlisting"
+> {title:D}
+{define:D 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D+ 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:D4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D6 1 x 0 0 2 0 2}
+{define:D7 1 x x 0 2 1 2}
+{define:D7#9 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D7(#9) 4 x 2 1 2 3 3}
+{define:D9 0 1 3 1 2 1 3}
+{define:D11 1 3 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:Dsus 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:Dsus2 1 0 0 0 2 3 0}
+{define:Dsus4 1 x x 0 2 3 3}
+{define:D7sus2 1 x 0 0 2 1 0}
+{define:D7sus4 1 x 0 0 2 1 3}
+{define:Dmaj 1 x x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:Dmaj7 1 x x 0 2 2 2}
+{define:Ddim 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dmin 1 x x 0 2 3 1}
+{define:D/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D/E 7 x 1 1 1 1 x}
+{define:D/G 1 3 x 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D5/E 7 0 1 1 1 x x}
+{define:Dadd9 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D(add9) 1 0 0 0 2 3 2}
+{define:D9add6 0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+{define:D9(add6)0 1 3 3 2 0 0}
+
+{define:Dm6(5b) 1 x x 0 1 0 1}
+{define:Dm7 1 x x 0 2 1 1}
+{define:Dm#5 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm(#5) 1 x x 0 3 3 2}
+{define:Dm#7 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm(#7) 1 x x 0 2 2 1}
+{define:Dm/A 1 x 0 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/B 1 x 2 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C 1 x 3 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm(F) 1 x x 3 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm/C# 1 x 4 0 2 3 1}
+{define:Dm9 1 x x 3 2 1 0}
+</PRE
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x858.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x903.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Song sheets</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Indexpage</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Indexpage</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Screenshots and examples"
+HREF="examples.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Chord table"
+HREF="x886.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Related links"
+HREF="links.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="x886.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 7. Screenshots and examples</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="links.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN903"
+>Indexpage</A
+></H1
+><P
+> <DIV
+CLASS="informaltable"
+><A
+NAME="AEN906"
+></A
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+BORDER="1"
+CLASS="CALSTABLE"
+><TBODY
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+VALIGN="MIDDLE"
+> <SPAN
+CLASS="inlinemediaobject"
+><IMG
+SRC="../../images/index.png"
+ALT="Index Page"
+></IMG
+></SPAN
+>
+</TD
+></TR
+></TBODY
+></TABLE
+><P
+></P
+></DIV
+>
+</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="x886.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="links.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Chord table</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="examples.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Related links</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Links</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.72
+"><LINK
+REL="HOME"
+TITLE="GuitarTeX"
+HREF="book1.html"><LINK
+REL="UP"
+TITLE="Related links"
+HREF="links.html"><LINK
+REL="PREVIOUS"
+TITLE="Related links"
+HREF="links.html"><LINK
+REL="NEXT"
+TITLE="Acknowledgements"
+HREF="a959.html"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="section"
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVHEADER"
+><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TH
+COLSPAN="3"
+ALIGN="center"
+>GuitarTeX</TH
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="links.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="80%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+>Chapter 8. Related links</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="10%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="bottom"
+><A
+HREF="a959.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H1
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN929"
+>Links</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN931"
+>LaTeX</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+> CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+ <A
+HREF="http://www.ctan.org"
+TARGET="_top"
+>http://www.ctan.org</A
+>
+ everything a LaTeX user needs!
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN937"
+>Perl</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+> CPAN: Comprehensive Perl Archive Network:
+ <A
+HREF="http://www.cpan.org"
+TARGET="_top"
+>http://www.cpan.org</A
+> everything a Perl programmer needs!
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="section"
+><H2
+CLASS="section"
+><A
+NAME="AEN943"
+>Guitar Sites</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+> Top 100 Guitar Sites!
+ <A
+HREF="http://www.top100guitarsites.com"
+TARGET="_top"
+>http://www.top100guitarsites.com</A
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+> Chordpack (another LaTeX based typesetting program for guitarists)
+ <A
+HREF="http://www.fi.muni.cz/~xpolansk/chordpack/"
+TARGET="_top"
+>http://www.fi.muni.cz/~xpolansk/chordpack/</A
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
+><HR
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
+SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
+WIDTH="100%"
+BORDER="0"
+CELLPADDING="0"
+CELLSPACING="0"
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="links.html"
+ACCESSKEY="P"
+>Prev</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="book1.html"
+ACCESSKEY="H"
+>Home</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="a959.html"
+ACCESSKEY="N"
+>Next</A
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="left"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Related links</TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="34%"
+ALIGN="center"
+VALIGN="top"
+><A
+HREF="links.html"
+ACCESSKEY="U"
+>Up</A
+></TD
+><TD
+WIDTH="33%"
+ALIGN="right"
+VALIGN="top"
+>Acknowledgements</TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+<bookinfo>
+ <author>
+ <firstname>Joachim</firstname>
+ <surname>Miltz</surname>
+ </author>
+ <date>January 2002</date>
+ <edition>Version 2.8</edition>
+ <copyright>
+ <year>2000-2002</year>
+ <holder>Joachim Miltz</holder>
+ </copyright>
+ <legalnotice>
+ <para>
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+ under
+ the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+ Software
+ Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
+ version.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ WITHOUT
+ ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+ FITNESS
+ FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more
+ details.
+ </para>
+ <para>
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ with
+ this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675
+ Mass
+ Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+ </para>
+ </legalnotice>
+
+ <abstract>
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX is a tool for guitarists who want to print good looking and easy
+ to play song sheets or song books from their chord or chordpro files.
+ It uses the well known chord format with several extensions.
+ The program was developed on a Linux system, but it should run on any
+ other
+ Unix system with a Perl/TK environment.
+ See <xref linkend="installation"/> for installing instructions and
+ <xref linkend="requirements"/> for further requirements.
+ </para>
+
+&sflogo;
+
+ </abstract>
+
+
+</bookinfo>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter>
+ <title>Installation</title>
+
+ <sect1>
+ <title>How to obtain GuitarTeX</title>
+ <para>
+ The current version can be obtained from the GuitarTeX download page:
+ <ulink url="http://sf.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=13226"/>.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="requirements">
+ <title>Requirements</title>
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX was created under Linux operating system.
+ It should run with any Linux dristribution and also on any other Unix
+ system. In addition it requires
+
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>LaTeX</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Perl</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Perl/TK</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+to be installed on your system.To create pdf output, your LaTeX distribution
+should also include
+
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>pdflatex</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+
+</para>
+
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="installation">
+ <title>Installing</title>
+ <para>To install GuitarTeX do the following:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>make sure that LaTeX, Perl and Perl/TK are installed
+ (see <xref linkend="requirements"/>)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>unpack the guitartex archive (for example
+ in your home directory)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>cd to the guitartex-x.x directory</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>run the following commands:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>make conf (as normal user, this overwrites an existing
+ config file!)</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>make install (as root)</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>You may now delete the guitartex-x.x directory</para>
+
+ <para>
+ "make conf" copies the configuration file into ~/.guitartexrc.
+ you may customize GuitarTeX by changing the configuration parameters
+ explained below.
+</para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="configfile">
+ <title>Configuration file</title>
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX looks for a configuration file called .guitartexrc in your
+home directory.
+ Parameters are set in perl syntax, for example:
+ <programlisting>$language = "de";</programlisting>
+ </para>
+
+ <table>
+ <title>Configuration parameters</title>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>parameter</entry>
+ <entry>meaning</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+ <tbody>
+ <row><entry>language</entry>
+ <entry>choose your favourite language</entry></row>
+<row><entry>tool_tips</entry> <entry>switch on or off tool tips for
+the icons</entry></row> <row><entry>highlight</entry>
+ <entry>switch on or off syntax highlighting</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_directive_foreground</entry>
+ <entry>highlighting foreground color for directives</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_directive_background</entry>
+ <entry>highlighting background color for directives</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_chord_foreground</entry>
+ <entry>highlighting foreground color for chords</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_chord_background</entry>
+ <entry>highlighting background color for chords</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_comment_foreground</entry>
+ <entry>highlighting foreground color for comments</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>highlight_comment_background</entry>
+ <entry>highlighting background color for comments</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>font_size</entry>
+ <entry>default font size</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_chorus</entry>
+ <entry>default color for chorus sections in printed
+ output</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_bridge</entry>
+ <entry>default color for bridge sections in printed
+ output</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_instr</entry>
+ <entry>default color for instrumental sections in printed
+ output</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_tab</entry>
+ <entry>default color for ascii tablature sections in printed
+ output</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_second</entry>
+ <entry>default foreground color for second voice sections in printed
+ output</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>color_second_back</entry>
+ <entry>default background color for second voice sections in printed
+ output</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>text_viewer</entry>
+ <entry>program to view the TeX file created by the export
+ function</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>ps_viewer</entry>
+ <entry>program to view the postscript file created by the export
+ function</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>pdf_viewer</entry>
+ <entry>program to view the PDF file created by the export
+ function</entry></row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ </sect1>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="introduction">
+ <title>Introduction</title>
+
+ <para>
+ First of all: my written English isn't perfect, but I hope this text will
+ help you nevertheless! For suggestions see <xref linkend="contacts"/>..
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX is a tool for guitarists who want to print good looking
+and easy to play song sheets or song books from their chord or chordpro files.
+It uses the well known chord format with several extensions.
+</para>
+<para>
+ It is based upon an idea of Martin Leclerc and Mario Dorion from
+ Canada
+ and their program Chord (Version 3.5 from 1993). To use GuitarTeX, you
+ need
+ to have knowledge of the Chord program (explained later). Though the LaTeX
+ text processing system is used by GuitarTeX, you don't have to know very
+ much
+ about it. GuitarTeX produces Postscript or PDF output automatically (if
+ you
+ want). The Chord directives supplied by GuitarTeX are described in
+ <xref linkend="directives"/>.
+ </para>
+
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<title>Features</title>
+<listitem><para>Graphical user interface with integrated editor and syntax
+highlighting</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Prints good looking song sheets including
+guitar chords without using monospace fonts</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Output formats: LaTeX, Postscript and PDF</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Compatible with ChordPro format, import function for ascii
+ format</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>Support for music typesetting with the LaTeX packages
+MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Flexible page
+layout (paper size, margins...)</para></listitem> <listitem><para> User defined
+colors for different parts of a song (e.g. verse, chorus)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Optional printing of chord symbols at the end of a
+ song</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Transpose up or down your song by mouse
+ clicks</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Creates single song sheets or complete song books with a title
+ page,
+ table of contents, headlines with page numbering, chord table and
+ index</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Supports ASCII tablature and the built in tablature directives
+ for
+ guitar
+ and bass tabs</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Support for multiple languages (if you don't find your
+ langauage, you
+ can
+ help the author to add it)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Runs on Linux operating system (it should run on any Unix
+ system that
+ is
+ supported by Perl/TK and LaTeX, but it is not tested)</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> Setup your song book project from single song files with the
+ include
+ directive</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para> LaTeX commands may be used in Chordpro files (for the
+ professionals)</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX converts a file with lyrics and chords in a special format to a
+ LaTeX file. Here is an example input file:
+ </para>
+
+ <programlisting>{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.
+
+{c:repeat chorus}</programlisting>
+
+ <para>
+ The ^-sign is new for users of other Chord clones.
+ It makes the following characters appear superscript.
+ You can see the output in <xref linkend="manualsong"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure id="manualsong">
+ <title>Print output from example file</title>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+ <graphic fileref="../../images/manualsong.png"/>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>
+ GuitarTeX converts the Chord format into "normal" LaTeX format like a kind
+ of preprocessor. This may be a single song or even a complete songbook.
+ You may as well translate your chord file directly into postscript or PDF
+ format.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ If you know LaTeX, you may edit the output file. The advantage of
+ GuitarTeX is that you can use all LaTeX features to design a single song
+ sheet or songbook, e.g.: packages like graphics or MusicTeX, table of
+ contents, marginal notes, and so on.
+ </para>
+
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="latex">
+ <title>Using LaTeX commands and packages</title>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Latex commands</title>
+ <para>
+ As I mentioned in the introduction, you don't have to know very
+ much about LaTeX to use GuitarTeX. You can use it even if you don't know
+ anything about LaTeX.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>
+ If you are familiar with LaTeX you can use any feature of it to improve your
+ song sheet or book. All lines of your chord file that begin with a backslash
+ will be left untouched by GuitarTeX. You may test this by inserting a simple
+ LaTeX command like this:
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>LaTeX command in chord file</title>
+ <programlisting>\marginpar{test}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>The result will be a marginal note with the word test.</para>
+
+ <para>
+ The LaTeX commands will be executed at the position they appear in the chord
+ file.
+ But sometimes you may want to add a command to the preamble, e.g. to include
+ other
+ LaTeX packages. This can be done using the <command>preamble</command>
+ directive:
+ </para>
+
+ <example>
+ <title>LaTeX command to be placed in the preamble</title>
+ <programlisting>{preamble:\usepackage(fancyheadings)}</programlisting>
+ </example>
+
+ <para>
+ The <command>preamble</command> directives may occur anywhere in your song.
+ They are added to the LaTeX preamble in the same order they appear in the
+ chord file.
+ </para>
+ </section>
+ <section>
+ <title>LaTeX packages MusixTeX, MusixLyr and TabDefs</title>
+ <para>MusixTeX is a powerfull LaTeX package for music typesetting.MusixLyr
+and TabDefs are additional LaTeX packages to improve lyrics and tablature
+typesetting with MusixTeX. You may use these packages within GuitarTeX by
+including one (or more) of the following directives (anywhere in your Chord
+file):
+</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>{musixtex}</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>{musixlyr}</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>{tabdefs}</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+<important><para>
+You must have installed the packages correctly before you may use them in GuitarTeX!
+Please read the documentation that comes with the packages.
+</para></important>
+
+<para>
+After this you may use LaTeX code for MusixTeX, MusixLyr or TabDefs at any place
+in your Chord file or better include them using the include directive
+(for Examples see <xref linkend="musixtex_examples"/>).
+</para>
+
+<sidebar>
+<title>
+
+By the way: please pay attention to the first words of the MusixTeX manual:
+
+</title>
+<para>
+"If you are not familiar with TeX at all I would recommend to find another
+software package to do musical typesetting.Setting up TeX and MusiTeX on your
+machine and mastering it is an awesome job which gobbles up a lot of your time
+and disk space. But, once you master it..."
+</para>
+<para>
+So you will understand that the Author of GuitarTeX cannot give
+any support for installing or using MusixTeX, MusixLyr or TabDefs.
+</para>
+</sidebar>
+ <section id="musixtex_examples">
+ <title>Examples</title>
+
+<example>
+<title>MusixTeX</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/musixtex1.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>MusixTeX example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>{musixtex}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\hsize=100mm
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac24}%
+\parindent 0pt
+\setsign1{-3}
+\startpiece\bigaccid
+\NOtes\qu{ce}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{gh}\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{=b}\enotes
+\Notes\ds\cu g\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu{^f=f}\enotes
+\NOtes\qu{=e}\itied0e\qu{_e}\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ttie0\Qqbu ed{_d}c\enotes
+\bar
+\Notes\ibu0b{-2}\qb0{=b}\enotes
+\notes\nbbu0\qb0{=a}\tqh0N\enotes
+\Notes\Dqbu cf\enotes
+\NOtes\uptext{\it tr}\qu e\uptext{\it tr}\qu d\enotes
+\bar
+\NOtes\qu c\qp\enotes
+\setdoubleBAR
+\stoppiece
+\bigskip
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.</programlisting>
+
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Metronomic indication</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/musixtex2.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>Metronomic indication</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>{musixtex}
+{title:The Manual Song}
+{st:No-one has yet claimed responsibility}
+
+\notes\metron{\qu}{60}\en
+
+[D]I print verses [A^7]in a [D]row,
+The next line gets put [A^7]down be[D]low,
+Mumble mumble [A^7]rhymes with [D]grow [G] [G#] [A]
+Done this verse, now [A^7susX]on we [quietly]go!</programlisting>
+</example>
+
+<example>
+<title>Enhanced lyrics typesetting with MusixLyr</title>
+
+<para>
+<informaltable frame="all"><tgroup cols='1'><tbody><row><entry>
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="../../images/musixlyr1.png"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>MusixLyr example</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</para>
+
+<programlisting>{musixtex}
+{musixlyr}
+
+{soc}
+[D]This is the [Bm]manual song
+[A^7]No-one really knows what's [D]goin' on
+[D]This is the [F#m]manual song
+[A^7]And now the chorus is already [D]gone
+{eoc}
+
+\par{
+\hsize=120mm
+\setlyrstrut
+\resetlyrics
+\setlyrics{Winter1}{Win-ter a-de\rlap{,} a-ber dein Schei-den macht\rlap{,}}
+\setlyrics{Winter2}{schei-den tut weh\rlap,}
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1,Winter2}
+\generalmeter{\meterfrac34}
+\generalsignature2
+\setsongraise1{-2mm}
+\startpiece
+\NOtes\qa{ffe}\en\bar
+\NOTesp\hup d\en\rightrepeat
+\assignlyrics1{Winter1}%
+\NOtes\qa{fgh}\en\bar
+\NOtes\qa h\en
+\Notes\beginmel\Ibu0gf1\qb0g\endmel\tqh0f\en
+\NOtes\qa g\en
+\endpiece
+}
+
+[D]The second verse is [A^7]like the [D]first,
+The music poor, the [A^7]verse is [D]worse,
+I wrote this since [A^7]I'd get [D]sued,
+If I used real songs. [A^7]This'll [D]do.</programlisting>
+</example>
+
+</section>
+
+</section>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+<chapter id="links">
+ <title>Related links</title>
+
+ <section id="contacts">
+ <title>Contacts</title>
+ <para>
+ To contact the author or other GuitarTeX users use
+ the mailing list: <ulink url="http://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/guitartex-users"/>
+ </para>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Links</title>
+ <section>
+ <title>LaTeX</title>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>
+ CTAN: Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+ <ulink url="http://www.ctan.org"/>
+ everything a LaTeX user needs!
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Perl</title>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>
+ CPAN: Comprehensive Perl Archive Network:
+ <ulink url="http://www.cpan.org"/> everything a Perl programmer needs!
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ <section>
+ <title>Guitar Sites</title>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>
+ Top 100 Guitar Sites!
+ <ulink url="http://www.top100guitarsites.com"/>
+ </para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>
+ Chordpack (another LaTeX based typesetting program for guitarists)
+ <ulink url="http://www.fi.muni.cz/~xpolansk/chordpack/"/>
+ </para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+ </section>
+ &sflogo;
+
+</chapter>
--- /dev/null
+
+<para>hosted by
+<ulink url="http://sourceforge.net">Sourceforge.net
+<inlinemediaobject>
+<imageobject>
+<imagedata fileref="http://sourceforge.net/sflogo.php?group_id=13226&type=1"/>
+</imageobject>
+<textobject>
+<phrase>SourceForge Logo</phrase>
+</textobject>
+</inlinemediaobject>
+</ulink>
+</para>
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+doc/de/guitartex/book1.html
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+doc/en/guitartex/book1.html
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+#!/usr/bin/perl
+
+use File::Basename;
+use Cwd;
+use Getopt::Long;
+
+GetOptions( "output=s" => \$output,
+ "lyrics" => \$lyrics,
+ "verbose" => \$verbose,
+ "italian" => \$italian,
+ );
+
+$usage = "This is gtx3tex 2.8
+usage: gtx2tex [--verbose] [--lyrics] [--output=ps|pdf] <file>
+options:
+--verbose lets gtx2tex tell you what it is doing
+--lyrics print only lyrics
+--output=ps|pdf specify the output format; without the
+ output option a tex file is created
+--italian changes chord output to italian notation
+ (La, Si, Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol)";
+
+
+if ( ! $ARGV[0] ){
+ die "$usage\n";
+}
+
+$verbose && print "This is gtx2tex\n";
+$verbose && print "$output\n";
+
+$libpath="/usr/local/lib/guitartex";
+
+# load configuration file
+$home=$ENV{"HOME"};
+$verbose && print "home=$home\n";
+do "$home/.guitartexrc" or die "cannot load guitartex.conf";
+
+$workdir = cwd;
+
+$verbose && print "work directory: $workdir\n";
+
+if ( $ARGV[0] =~ /^\// ){
+ $filename = $ARGV[0];
+}else{
+ $filename = $workdir . "/" . $ARGV[0];
+}
+
+$outfilename = basename($filename);
+$dirname = dirname($filename);
+$outfilename =~ s/\.(.*?)$//; # Suffix entfernen
+$verbose && print "input file name is: $filename\n";
+$verbose && print "output directory is: $dirname\n";
+$verbose && print "output file name is: $outfilename\n";
+
+chdir $dirname;
+
+$env = "normal";
+$space = "~";
+$empty_line = "\n";
+$new_page = "\\newpage\n";
+$sharp = "\$\\sharp\$";
+$flat = "\$\\flat\$";
+$chorus_begin = "\\begin{chorus}\n";
+$chorus_end = "\\end{chorus}\n";
+$bridge_begin = "\\begin{bridge}\n";
+$bridge_end = "\\end{bridge}\n";
+$instr_begin = "\\begin{instr}\n";
+$instr_end = "\\end{instr}\n";
+$tab_begin = "\\begin{gtxtab}\n";
+$tab_end = "\\end{gtxtab}\n";
+$define = "";
+
+#load language file
+do "/usr/local/lib/guitartex/language/$language.pl" or die "cannot load language
+ file $language.pl\n";
+
+
+# Leerzeichen im Dateinamen in Unterstriche ändern
+$outfilename =~ s/\s/\_/g;
+
+# open output file
+open ( TEX, ">$outfilename.tex" ) || die "cannot open output file";
+
+# LaTeX-Header ausgeben
+latex_header();
+
+$chaptercount = 0;
+
+# Eingabedatei zeilenweise bearbeiten
+while ( <CHORDPRO> ) {
+ # Zeichen für Zeilenende abschneiden
+ chomp;
+ # wenn am Anfang der Zeile { steht, handelt es sich um eine Direktive
+ if ( /^{/ ){ directive(); next; }
+ # Leerzeile
+ if ( /^$/ ){ print TEX "$empty_line\n"; next; }
+ # wenn am Anfang der Zeile % oder # steht = Kommentar
+ if ( /^[%#]/ ){ next; }
+ # wenn am Anfang der Zeile \ steht = Latex-Kommando
+ if ( /\\.*/ ){ print TEX "$_\n"; next; }
+ # innerhalb einer Tabulatur
+ if ( $env eq "tab" ) {
+ print TEX "\\footnotesize \\verb!$_! \\normalsize \\newline\n"; next;
+ }
+ crdpro();
+ }
+ # LaTeX-Footer ausgeben
+ latex_footer();
+
+ system ( "rm -f $outfilename.tmp" );
+
+ $output eq "ps" && create_ps();
+ $output eq "pdf" && create_pdf();
+
+
+ sub create_ps {
+ $verbose && print "creating postscript\n";
+ system ( "rm -f *.log *.aux *.ilg *.idx *.ind *.dvi *.toc *.mx1 *.mx2" );
+ system ( "latex --interaction batchmode $outfilename" ) && die "error in first LaTeX run";
+ if ( $document_class eq "book" ){
+ system ( "makeindex $outfilename.idx" ) && die "error while creating index";
+ }
+ if ( $musixtex eq "yes" ){
+ system ( "musixflx $outfilename" ) && die "error in musixflx run";
+ }
+ if ( $document_class eq "book" or $musixtex eq "yes" ){
+ system ( "latex --interaction batchmode $outfilename" ) && die "error in second LaTeX run";
+ }
+ system ( "dvips $outfilename" ) && die "error while converting from dvi to postscript";
+ system ( "rm -f *.log *.aux *.ilg *.idx *.ind *.dvi *.toc *.mx1 *.mx2 $outfilename.tex" );
+ }
+
+
+ sub create_pdf {
+ $verbose && print "creating pdf\n";
+ system ( "rm -f *.tpt *.log *.aux *.ilg *.idx *.ind *.dvi *.toc *.mx? *.mx2" );
+ system ( "pdflatex $outfilename" ) && die "error while creating pdf output";
+ if ( $document_class eq "book" ){
+ system ( "makeindex $outfilename.idx" ) && die "error while creating index";
+ }
+ if ( $musixtex eq "yes" ){
+ system ( "musixflx $outfilename" ) && die "error in musixflx run";
+ }
+ system ( "pdflatex $outfilename" ) && die "error while creating pdf output";
+ system ( "thumbpdf $outfilename" ) && die "error while creating pdf thumbnails";
+ system ( "pdflatex $outfilename" ) && die "error while creating pdf output";
+ system ( "rm -f *.tpt *.log *.aux *.ilg *.idx *.ind *.dvi *.toc *.mx1 *.mx2 $outfilename.tex" );
+ }
+
+
+
+sub crdpro { # Bearbeitung der Zeile aus der Eingabedatei
+ if ( $lyrics ){
+ s/\[.*?\]//g; # Akkorde entfernen
+ print TEX "$_\\\\\n" unless ( /^\s*$/ );
+ }else{
+
+ s/\s/$space/g; # alle Leerzeichen durch feste Leerzeichen ersetzen
+ s/(\^)(.*?)(\])/\\\(^\{\2\}\\\)\]/g; # Ziffern hochstellen
+
+ s/\[/\}\\gtxchord{/g; # linke Klammer ersetzen
+ s/\]/}{/g; # rechte Klammer ersetzen
+ # s/(\})(.*?)(\\)/}{\2}\\/g; # Text zwischen Akkorden in geschweifte Klammern setzen
+ s/$/}/; # rechte Klammer am Ende der Zeile ergänzen
+ s/^\}//; # rechte Klammer am Anfang der Zeile entfernen
+ if ( $_ !~ /^\\/ ) { s/^/\\gtxchord\{\}\{/ }
+
+ s/#/$sharp/g; # Vorzeichen "#" ersetzen
+ s/\{Ab/{A$flat/g; # Vorzeichen "b" ersetzen
+ s/\{Bb/{B$flat/g;
+ s/\{Cb/{C$flat/g;
+ s/\{Db/{D$flat/g;
+ s/\{Eb/{E$flat/g;
+ s/\{Fb/{F$flat/g;
+ s/\{Gb/{G$flat/g;
+ if ( $italian ) {
+ s/gtxchord\{D/gtxchord{Re/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{E/gtxchord{Mi/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{F/gtxchord{Fa/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{G/gtxchord{Sol/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{A/gtxchord{La/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{B/gtxchord{Si/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{H/gtxchord{Si/g;
+ s/gtxchord\{C/gtxchord{Do/g;
+
+ s!/D!/Re!g;
+ s!/E!/Mi!g;
+ s!/F!/Fa!g;
+ s!/G!/Sol!g;
+ s!/A!/La!g;
+ s!/B!/Si!g;
+ s!/H!/Si!g;
+ s!/C!/Do!g;
+
+ }
+ print TEX "$_\\\\\n";
+ }
+}
+
+
+sub directive{
+ if ( /{soc}|{start_of_chorus}/ ) { $env = "chorus"; print TEX "$chorus_begin";
+ }elsif ( /{eoc}|{end_of_chorus/ ) { $env = "normal"; print TEX "$chorus_end";
+ }elsif ( /{sob}|{start_of_bridge}/ ) { $env = "bridge"; print TEX "$bridge_begin";
+ }elsif ( /{eob}|{end_of_bridge/ ) { $env = "normal"; print TEX "$bridge_end";
+ }elsif ( /{soi}|{start_of_instr}/ ) {
+ $env = "instr";
+ print TEX "$instr_begin" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{eoi}|{end_of_instr/ ) {
+ $env = "normal";
+ print TEX "$instr_end" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{sot}|{start_of_tab}/ ) {
+ $env = "tab";
+ print TEX "$tab_begin" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{eot}|{end_of_tab/ ) {
+ $env = "normal";
+ print TEX "$tab_end" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{np}/ ) {
+ print TEX "$new_page";
+ }elsif ( /{even}/ ) {
+ print TEX "\\ifthenelse{\\isodd{\\thepage}}{}{\\newpage ~}";
+ }elsif ( /{title:|{t:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ if ( $document_class eq "book" ){
+ print TEX "$define" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }
+ print TEX "%\n%----- New Song -----\n";
+ print TEX "\\newpage\\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{$_}\n";
+ if ( $output eq "pdf" ) { print TEX "\\pdfdest name {$_} fith \\pdfoutline goto name {$_} {$_}" }
+ print TEX "\\begin{center} \\section*{$_}\\end{center}\n";
+ $define="";
+ print TEX "\\index{$_}";
+ $song_title = $_;
+ $verbose && print TEX "\\typeout{$_}";
+ }elsif ( /{subtitle:|{st:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ print TEX "\\index{$_!$song_title}";
+ print TEX "\\begin{center}$_\\end{center}\n";
+ }elsif ( /{margin:|{m:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ print TEX "\\marginpar{$_}\n";
+ }elsif ( /{comment:|{c:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ print TEX "\\textit{$_}\\\\\n" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{second:|{2:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ s/\s/$space/g; #Leerzeichen durch feste Leerzeichen ersetzen
+ print TEX "\\colorbox{second_back}{\\textcolor{second_text}{$_}}\\\\\n" unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{chapter:/ ) {
+ $chaptercount++;
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ if ( $document_class eq "book" ) {
+ print TEX "$define" unless ( $lyrics );
+ $define = "";
+ print TEX "\n\\chapter{$_} \\fancyhead[CO]{$_}\n\n";
+ if ( $output eq "pdf" ) {
+ $count = $titlecount[$chaptercount];
+ $verbose && print TEX "% chapter: $_, $count entries\n";
+ print TEX "\\pdfdest name {$_} fith \\pdfoutline goto name {$_} count $count {$_}"
+ }
+ $verbose && print TEX "\\typeout{$_}";
+ };
+ }elsif ( /{define/ ) {
+ s/\{//;
+ s/\}//;
+ s/define//;
+ s/://;
+ s/base-fret//;
+ s/frets//;
+ s/[Xx]/-1/g;
+ s/- /-1/g;
+ s/-$/-1/g;
+ s/-1/x/g;
+ @def = split(" ",$_);
+ @def[0] =~ s/#/\\#/g;
+ #$define .= "\\mbox{\\begin{picture}(20,18)\\special{\"0 0 moveto ";
+ #$define .= "($def[0]) $def[2] $def[3] $def[4] $def[5] $def[6] $def[7] $def[1]";
+ #$define .= " 0 dots}\\end{picture}}\n";
+ $define .= " ~\\gchord{{$def[1]}}{$def[2],$def[3],$def[4],$def[5],$def[6],$def[7]}{$def[0]}";
+ }elsif ( /{guitartab:/ ) {
+ print TEX "\\guitartab\n" unless ( $lyrics );
+ newtab() unless ( $lyrics );
+ }elsif ( /{basstab:/ ) {
+ print TEX "\\basstab\n" unless ( $lyrics );
+ newtab() unless ( $lyrics );
+ }
+
+}
+
+
+sub newtab {
+ if ( /{guitartab:/ ) { $guitartab="yes" } else { $guitartab ="no" };
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ s/\]\[/\]~~~\[/g; #fill in fixed spaces between notes
+ s/\_/~~~/g; #fill in extra space
+ s/\s/~/g; #replace spaces with fixed spaced
+ s/\]&\[/\]\[/g; #chord
+ s/\[1;/\[2.5ex;/g;
+ s/\[2;/\[4.5ex;/g;
+ s/\[3;/\[6.5ex;/g;
+ s/\[4;/\[8.5ex;/g;
+ s/\[5;/\[10.5ex;/g;
+ s/\[6;/\[12.5ex;/g;
+ if ( $guitartab eq "yes") {
+ s/\|/~~~\[3.7ex;\|\][5.7ex;\|\][7.7ex;\|\][9.7ex;\|\][11.3ex;\|\]~~~/g;
+ }else{
+ s/\|/~~~\[3.7ex;\|\][5.7ex;\|\][7.3ex;\|\]~~~/g;
+ }
+ s/\[/\\gtxtabs{/g;
+ s/\]/\}/g;
+ s/;/\}\{/g;
+ print TEX "$_\n\n";
+}
+
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine latex_header
+#
+# write the start of the LaTeX file
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+sub latex_header {
+
+ includes();
+
+ $document_class = "article"; #default document class
+ if ( $output eq "ps" ){$geometry = "dvips, "} #default geometry parameter
+ $preamble = ""; #default preamble parameter
+ $musixtex = "no";
+ $musixlyr = "no";
+ $tabdefs = "no";
+ $chaptercount = 0;
+ @titlecount = (0);
+
+ open ( CHORDPRO, "$dirname/$outfilename.tmp" ) || die "cannot open input file";
+
+ # read the whole document for settings
+ while ( <CHORDPRO> ){
+ if ( /^{/ ) { # nur Zeilen mit Direktiven bearbeiten
+ chomp;
+ if ( /{book_title:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $title = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{book_author:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $author = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{book_date:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $date = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{document_class:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $document_class = $_ ;
+ $verbose && print "Document_class: $document_class\n";
+ if ( $document_class ne "book" && $document_class ne "article" ) {
+ die "parameter of directive document_class must be \"book\" or \"article\"\n";
+ }
+ }elsif ( /{font_size:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $font_size = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{color_chorus:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $color_chorus = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{color_bridge:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $color_bridge = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{color_instr:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $color_instr = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{color_tab:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $color_tab = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{color_second:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $color_second = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{color_second_back:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $color_second_back = $_ ;
+ }elsif ( /{geometry:|{g:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $geometry .= "$_," ;
+ }elsif ( /{preamble:|{p:/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $preamble .= "$_\n" ;
+ }elsif ( /{musixtex}/ ) {
+ $musixtex = "yes";
+ }elsif ( /{musixlyr}/ ) {
+ $musixlyr = "yes";
+ }elsif ( /{tabdefs}/ ) {
+ $tabdefs = "yes";
+ }elsif ( /{chapter/ ) {
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ $chaptercount++;
+ push @titlecount, (0);
+ }elsif ( /{title:|{t:/ ) {
+ $titlecount[$chaptercount]++;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+$verbose && print "$chaptercount chapters, @titlecount\n";
+
+chop $geometry; #delete last comma
+close ( CHORDPRO );
+
+
+
+#open temporary file
+open ( CHORDPRO, "$dirname/$outfilename.tmp" ) || die "cannot open input file";
+
+#print preamble into LaTeX file
+if ( $output eq "pdf" ) { print TEX "\\pdfoutput=1
+\\pdfcompresslevel=9
+\\pdfpageheight=29.7cm
+\\pdfpagewidth=21cm
+\\pdfcatalog {/PageMode /UseOutlines}
+\\pdfinfo {
+ /Title ($title)
+ /Author ($author)
+ /CreationDate ($date)
+ /Producer (GuitarTeX by Joachim Miltz)
+}
+";
+}
+
+
+print TEX "\\documentclass[$languages{$language},";
+
+if ( $output eq "pdf" ) { print TEX " pdftex," }
+
+print TEX " $font_size"."pt]{$document_class}
+\\usepackage[$geometry]{geometry}
+\\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+";
+
+if ( $language eq "pl" ){
+ print TEX "\\usepackage[latin2]{inputenc}\n"
+}else{
+ print TEX "\\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}\n"
+}
+
+
+print TEX "\\usepackage{babel}
+\\usepackage{color}
+\\usepackage{graphicx}
+\\usepackage{ifthen}
+\\usepackage{calc}
+\\usepackage{gchords}
+%
+";
+
+
+if ( $output eq "pdf" ){
+print TEX "\\usepackage[pdftex]{thumbpdf}\n";
+}
+
+if ( $musixtex eq "yes" ){
+print TEX "
+\\input{musixtex}
+\\input{musixlyr}
+\\input{tabdefs}
+"
+}
+
+if ( $document_class eq "book" ){
+print TEX "
+\\title{$title}
+\\author{$author}
+\\date{$date}
+\\usepackage{makeidx}
+\\makeindex
+\\usepackage{fancyhdr}
+\\pagestyle{fancy}
+"
+}else{
+print TEX "
+\\pagestyle{empty}
+"};
+
+print TEX "
+%
+%------definition of font colors-----------
+\\definecolor{chorus}{rgb}{$color_chorus}
+\\definecolor{bridge}{rgb}{$color_bridge}
+\\definecolor{instr}{rgb}{$color_instr}
+\\definecolor{tab}{rgb}{$color_tab}
+\\definecolor{second_text}{rgb}{$color_second}
+\\definecolor{second_back}{rgb}{$color_second_back}
+%
+%------definition of environments-------
+\\newenvironment{chorus}{\\color{chorus}}{\\normalcolor}
+\\newenvironment{bridge}{\\color{bridge}}{\\normalcolor}
+\\newenvironment{instr}{\\color{instr}}{\\normalcolor}
+\\newenvironment{gtxtab}{\\color{tab}}{\\normalcolor}
+%
+%------counter for line numbers------
+%\\newcounter{verscnt}[section]
+%\\newcommand{\\vers}{\\stepcounter{verscnt}%
+%\\makebox[0.5cm][r]{\\scriptsize\\theverscnt\\normalsize}%
+%\\makebox[0.5cm]{}}
+%
+\\newcommand{\\gtxchordsize}{\\footnotesize}
+\\setlength{\\parindent}{0pt}
+
+%------PostScript-Header für die Chord-Songs------
+%\\special{header=$libpath/chord-common.ps}
+
+\\sloppy
+\\setlength{\\unitlength}{1mm}
+
+\\newcommand{\\gtxchord}[2]{\\sbox{\\gtxchordbox}{#1}\\sbox{\\textbox}{#2}%
+ \\ifthenelse{\\lengthtest{\\wd\\textbox>\\wd\\gtxchordbox}}%
+ {%
+ \\raisebox{2ex}[2ex][2.5ex]{\\makebox[0pt][l]{\\scriptsize\\bf#1}}#2%
+ }{%
+ \\raisebox{2ex}[2ex][2.5ex]{\\makebox[0pt][l]{\\scriptsize\\bf#1}}\\makebox[\\wd\\gtxchordbox+0.5em][l]{#2}%
+ }%
+}%
+
+\\newcommand{\\guitartab}{%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{12.5ex}{\\footnotesize{e}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{10.5ex}{\\footnotesize{B}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{8.5ex}{\\footnotesize{G}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{6.5ex}{\\footnotesize{D}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{4.5ex}{\\footnotesize{A}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{2.5ex}{\\footnotesize{E}}}%
+~~
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{13ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{11ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{9ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{7ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{5ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{3ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+~}
+
+\\newcommand{\\basstab}{%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{8.5ex}{\\footnotesize{G}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{6.5ex}{\\footnotesize{D}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{4.5ex}{\\footnotesize{A}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{2.5ex}{\\footnotesize{E}}}%
+~~
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{9ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{7ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{5ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{3ex}{\\line(1,0){130}}}%
+~}
+
+\\newcommand{\\gtxtabs}[2]{\\makebox[0cm][l]{\\raisebox{#1}{#2}}}
+
+$preamble
+
+%------start of document-----------
+\\begin{document}
+\\newsavebox{\\gtxchordbox}
+\\newsavebox{\\textbox}
+";
+
+if ( $document_class eq "book" ){
+print TEX "
+\\fancyhead
+\\fancyfoot
+\\frontmatter
+\\maketitle
+\\tableofcontents
+\\mainmatter
+\\fancyhead[CE]{$title}
+\\fancyhead[LE,RO]{\\thepage}
+"};
+
+print TEX "%\n%\n";
+}
+
+
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine latex_footer
+#
+# write the end of the LaTeX file
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub latex_footer {
+ print TEX "$define\n";
+ if ( $document_class eq "book") {
+ print TEX "\\backmatter";
+ print TEX "\\printindex\n";
+ }
+ print TEX "\\end{document}\n";
+ close ( TEX );
+}
+
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine includes
+#
+# look for includes, save everything into a temporary file
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub includes{
+ open ( TMP, ">$dirname/$outfilename.tmp" ) || die "cannot open temporary output file";
+ # open input file
+ open ( CHORDPRO, "$filename" ) || die "cannot open input file";
+ while ( <CHORDPRO> ){
+ if ( /{include:/ ) { #read only lines with an include directive
+ s/({.*:)(.+)(})/\2/;
+ print TMP "#$_\n#\n";
+ open ( INSERT, "$dirname/$_" ) || die "cannot open file to insert: $_";
+ while ( <INSERT> ){ #insert file to include
+ print TMP;
+ }
+ }else{
+ print TMP;
+ }
+ close (INSERT);
+ }
+ close ( CHORDPRO );
+ close ( TMP );
+ }
--- /dev/null
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Languages
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# supported Languages:
+# define hash with supported languages
+$languages{"en"} = "english";
+$languages{"de"} = "german";
+$languages{"it"} = "italian";
+$languages{"br"} = "brazilian";
+$languages{"pl"} = "polish";
+$languages{"es"} = "spanish";
+
+$language="de";
+
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Tool tips
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# GuitarTeX shows tool tips if the mouse cursor stays over an icon
+# for a short time
+$tool_tips = "yes";
+
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Syntax highlighting
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# turn on or off syntax highlighting
+# supported values: 'yes' turns highlighting on, any other value turns highlighting off
+
+$highlight = "yes";
+
+# highlighting colors
+# colors may be given as rgb values in hex (e.g. #ffffff for white) or by name (e.g. black)
+# a list of all supported color names can be found in the color dialog box (see color menu)
+
+# highlighting colors for directives
+$highlight_directive_foreground = "red";
+$highlight_directive_background = "#ffe0e0";
+# highlighting colors for chords
+$highlight_chord_foreground = "midnightblue";
+$highlight_chord_background = "#e0e0ff";
+# highlighting colors for comments
+$highlight_comment_foreground = "white";
+$highlight_comment_background = "lightgrey";
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# default values for printed output
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#font size, supported values: 10, 11, 12
+$font_size = "11";
+
+#default colors
+#colors are comma separated decimal values from 0 to 1 (e.g. 1,1,1 for white)
+
+#default color for chorus
+$color_chorus = "1,0,0";
+#default color for bridge
+$color_bridge = "0,0,1";
+#default color for instrumental part
+$color_instr = ".3,.3,.3";
+#default color for ascii tablature
+$color_tab = ".3,.3,.3";
+#default foreground and background color for second voice
+$color_second = "1,1,1";
+$color_second_back = ".7,.7,.7";
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# text viewer
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# after creating a latex file, you can view/edit it with the program specified here
+# add your favourite editor here
+#
+# $text_viewer = "kwrite";
+# $text_viewer = "emacs";
+$text_viewer = "kate";
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# postscript viewer
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# after creating a postscript file, you can view it with the viewer specified here
+#
+# $ps_viewer = "gv";
+$ps_viewer = "kghostview";
+
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# pdf viewer
+#-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# after creating a pdf file, you can view it with the viewer specified here
+#
+# $pdf_viewer = "gv";
+# $pdf_viewer = "acroread";
+$pdf_viewer = "kghostview";
+
+1; # this must be the last line !
--- /dev/null
+#!/usr/bin/perl
+
+use Tk;
+use Tk::ErrorDialog;
+use Tk::DialogBox;
+use Tk::Clipboard;
+use Tk::Balloon;
+use File::Basename;
+use Getopt::Std;
+#use FindBin;
+
+$libpath="/usr/local/lib/guitartex";
+
+# load configuration file
+$home=$ENV{"HOME"};
+do "$home/.guitartexrc" or die "cannot load guitartex.conf";
+
+# load subroutines
+foreach $file (
+ "sub_gui.pl", #perl/tk gui, synatax highlighting, check for f-keys
+ "sub_menu_file.pl", #file menu
+ "sub_menu_edit.pl", #edit menu
+ "sub_menu_colors.pl", #colors menu
+ "sub_menu_transpose.pl", #transpose menu
+ "sub_menu_help.pl", #help menu
+ ){
+ unless ($return = do "$libpath/$file") { warn "parsing $file failed: $@" if $@ }
+}
+
+#load language file
+do "$libpath/language/$language.pl" or die "cannot load file language/$language.pl\n";
+
+gui();
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine gui
+#
+# setup the graphical user interface
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub gui {
+ #create main window
+ $mw = MainWindow->new;
+ $mw -> title ("GuitarTeX");
+
+ #create editor in $t
+ $t = $mw -> Scrolled ( "Text", -background => 'white',
+ -relief => 'flat', -wrap => 'none',
+ -scrollbars => 'se', -exportselection => '0' );
+
+ #call subroutine check_key if any key is pressed (to handle F5, F6 ...)
+ $t -> bind ( "<Key>", [\&check_key, Ev('k')] );
+
+ #create a frame for the menu bar
+ $menu_frame = $mw -> Frame -> pack ( -side => 'top', -fill => 'x');
+
+ #create the file menu
+ $menu_file = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_file,
+ -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_new, -command => \&menu_file_new],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_open, -command => \&menu_file_open],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_save, -command => \&menu_file_save],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_saveas, -command => \&menu_file_saveas],
+ "-",
+ [cascade => $name_menu_export, -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_latex, -command => \&export_latex],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_postscript, -command => \&export_postscript],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_pdf, -command => \&export_pdf],
+ ],
+ ],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_quit, -command => \&menu_file_quit],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'left', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #create the edit menu
+ $menu_edit = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_edit,
+ -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_paste1, -command => \&menu_edit_paste],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_insert, -command => \&menu_edit_insert],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_crd, -command => \&menu_edit_crd2chopro, -accelerator => "F9"],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_cut, -state => 'disabled'],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_copy, -state => 'disabled'],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_paste2, -state => 'disabled'],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'left', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #create the directives menu
+ $menu_directives = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_directives,
+ -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_startchorus, -command =>sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{soc}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_endchorus, -command =>sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{eoc}\n", 'directive')}],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_startbridge, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{sob}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_endbridge, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{eob}\n", 'directive')}],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_starttab, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{sot}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_endtab, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{eot}\n", 'directive')}],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_startinstr, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{soi}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_endinstr, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{eoi}\n", 'directive')}],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_guitartab, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{guitartab:}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_basstab, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{basstab:}\n", 'directive')}],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_title, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{t:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_subtitle, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{st:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_newpage, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{np}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_comment, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{c:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_margin, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{m:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_second, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{2:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'left', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #create the songbook menu
+ $menu_songbook = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_songbook,
+ -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_book, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert","{document_class:book}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_booktitle, -command => sub{ $t->insert("insert linestart","{book_title:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_bookauthor, -command => sub{ $t->insert("insert linestart","{book_author:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_bookdate, -command => sub{ $t->insert("insert linestart","{book_date:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_chapter, -command => sub{ $t->insert("insert linestart","{chapter:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_include, -command => sub{ $t->insert("insert linestart","{include:", 'directive'); $t->insert("insert lineend","}\n", 'directive');}],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_even, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{even}\n", 'directive')}],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'left', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #create the colors menu
+ $menu_colors = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_color,
+ -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_colorchorus, -command => \&colors_chorus],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_colorbridge, -command => \&colors_bridge],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_colortab, -command => \&colors_tab],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_colorinstr, -command => \&colors_instr],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_second, -command => \&colors_second],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_secondback, -command => \&colors_second_back],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'left', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #create the transpose menu
+ $menu_transpose = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_transpose,
+ -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_transup, -command => \&transpose_up, -accelerator => "F5"],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_transdown, -command => \&transpose_down, -accelerator => "F6"],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_transsharp, -command => \&transpose_flat2sharp, -accelerator => "F7"],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_transflat, -command => \&transpose_sharp2flat, -accelerator => "F8"],
+ "-",
+ ['command' => $name_menu_transgerman, -command => \&transpose_b2h],
+ ['command' => $name_menu_transinternational, -command => \&transpose_h2b],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'left', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #create the help menu
+ $menu_help = $menu_frame -> Menubutton (-textvariable => \$name_menu_help, -tearoff => '0', -menuitems => [
+ ['command' => $name_menu_help, -command => \&documentation],
+ ['command' => "$name_menu_about GuitarTeX", -command => \&about],
+ ]
+ )->pack (-side => 'right');
+
+ #create a frame for the icons
+ $icon_frame0 = $mw -> Frame ( -relief => "flat", -borderwidth => 0 ) -> pack ( -side => 'top', -anchor => 'w' );
+ # create file new icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/filenew.gif" );
+ $icon_file_new = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&menu_file_new) -> pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create file open icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/fileopen.gif" );
+ $icon_file_open = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&menu_file_open) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create file save icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/filesave.gif" );
+ $icon_file_save = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&menu_file_save) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create export latex icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/tex.gif" );
+ $icon_latex = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&export_latex) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create export postscript icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/postscript.gif" );
+ $icon_ps = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&export_postscript) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create export pdf icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/pdf.gif" );
+ $icon_pdf = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&export_pdf) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create transpose up icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/up.gif" );
+ $icon_transpose_up = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&transpose_up) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create transpos down icon
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/down.gif" );
+ $icon_transpose_down = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&transpose_down) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ #create syntax highlighting icon
+ if ( $highlight eq "yes" ) {
+ $icon = $mw -> Photo ( -file => "$libpath/images/color.gif" );
+ $icon_highlight = $icon_frame0 -> Button(-image => $icon, -relief=>'flat', -command => \&highlight) ->pack(-side=>'left' );
+ }
+
+ #create frame for chord icons
+ $icon_frame1 = $mw -> Frame ( -relief => "flat", -borderwidth => 2 ) -> pack ( -side => 'top', -anchor => 'w' );
+ #create a button for each key
+ $icon_frame1 -> Label( -text=>$name_icon_chords, -width=>10 )->pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_chord_c = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"C", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[C]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_c2 = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"C#", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[C#]",'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_d = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"D", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[D]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_d2 = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"D#", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[D#]",'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_e = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"E", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[E]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_f = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"F", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[F]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_f2 = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"F#", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[F#]",'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_g = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"G", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[G]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_g2 = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"G#", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[G#]",'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_a = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"A", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[A]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_bb = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>"Bb", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[Bb]",'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+ $icon_chord_b = $icon_frame1 -> Button( -text=>$name_note_B, -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[B]", 'chord')} )->pack(-side=>'left');
+
+ #create frame for tablature icons
+ $tab_frame = $mw -> Frame ( -relief => "groove", -borderwidth => 0 ) -> pack ( -side => 'top', -anchor => 'w' );
+ $tab_frame -> Label( -text => $name_icon_tab, -width=>10 )->pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ #create button for guitar tablature
+ $icon_guitartab = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>$name_icon_guitar, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{guitartab:}\n")}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ #create button for bass tablature
+ $icon_basstab = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>$name_icon_bass, -command => sub{$t->insert("insert linestart","{basstab:}\n")}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ #create entry field for fret number
+ $tab_frame -> Label( -text=>$name_icon_fret )->pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_fret = $tab_frame -> Entry( -width=>3, -relief=>'sunken', -background=>'white', -textvariable=>\$tab)->pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ #create a button for each string
+ $tab_frame -> Label( -text=>$name_icon_string )->pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_string_E = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>"E", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[1;$tab]");$tab=""}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_string_A = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>"A", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[2;$tab]");$tab=""}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_string_D = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>"D", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[3;$tab]");$tab=""}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_string_G = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>"G", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[4;$tab]");$tab=""}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_string_B = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>$name_note_B, -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[5;$tab]");$tab=""}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+ $icon_string_e = $tab_frame -> Button( -text=>"e", -command=>sub{$t->insert("insert","[6;$tab]");$tab=""}) -> pack ( -side => 'left' );
+
+ #create status bar and connect it to $info
+ $status_bar = $mw->Label(-textvariable => \$info) -> pack( -side => 'bottom', -anchor => 'w');
+
+ #show the editor and give it the cursor focus
+ $t -> pack( -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
+ $t ->focus();
+
+ #define tags for syntax highlighting
+ if ( $highlight eq "yes" ) {
+ $t -> tagConfigure ('directive', -foreground => $highlight_directive_foreground, -background => $highlight_directive_background );
+ $t -> tagConfigure ('comment', -foreground => $highlight_comment_foreground, -background => $highlight_comment_background );
+ $t -> tagConfigure ('chord', -foreground => $highlight_chord_foreground, -background => $highlight_chord_background );
+ }
+
+ #attach tool tip balloons to icons
+ if ( $tool_tips eq "yes" ){
+ $balloon = $mw -> Balloon (-statusbar => $status_bar );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_file_new, -balloonmsg => $balloon_new );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_file_open, -balloonmsg => $balloon_open );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_file_save, -balloonmsg => $balloon_save );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_latex, -balloonmsg => $balloon_latex );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_ps, -balloonmsg => $balloon_ps );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_pdf, -balloonmsg => $balloon_pdf );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_transpose_up, -balloonmsg => $balloon_transpose_up );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_transpose_down, -balloonmsg => $balloon_transpose_down );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_c, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_c2, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_d, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_d2, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_e, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_f, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_f2, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_g, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_g2, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_a, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_bb, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_chord_b, -balloonmsg => $balloon_chord );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_guitartab, -balloonmsg => $balloon_guitartab );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_basstab, -balloonmsg => $balloon_basstab );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_fret, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_string_E, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_string_A, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_string_D, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_string_G, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_string_B, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ $balloon -> attach ( $icon_string_e, -balloonmsg => $balloon_fret );
+ if ( $highlight eq "yes" ) {$balloon -> attach ( $icon_highlight, -balloonmsg => $balloon_highlight )};
+ }
+
+ #start the graphical user interface
+ MainLoop;
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine check_key
+#
+# is called by the editor on every key stroke to check for function keys
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub check_key {
+ $taste = $_[1];
+ if ( $taste == 71 ) { transpose_up(); } # F5
+ if ( $taste == 72 ) { transpose_down(); } # F6
+ if ( $taste == 73 ) { transpose_flat2sharp(); } # F7
+ if ( $taste == 74 ) { transpose_sharp2flat(); } # F8
+ if ( $taste == 75 ) { menu_edit_crd2chopro(); } # F9
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine highlight
+#
+# parses the text in the editor to highlight chords and directives
+# define the colors in guitartex.conf
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub highlight {
+ if ( $highlight eq "yes" ) {
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #store text from the editor in variabel $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text in the editor
+ @lines = split (/\n/, $text); #split the text into an array of lines
+ foreach $line (@lines) {
+ if ( $line=~/^{/ ) { #if the line starts with '{' it is a directive
+ $t -> insert ( "end", "$line\n", 'directive' ); #insert line with directive colors
+ }elsif ( $line=~/^#/ ) { #if the line starts with '#' it is a comment
+ $t -> insert ( "end", $line, 'comment' );
+ }elsif ( $line=~/\[.*\]/ ){ #if the line contains chords
+ @words = split (/\[/, $line); #split the line at every chord
+ foreach $word (@words) {
+ @words2 = split (/\]/, $word); #split chord and lyrics
+ if ( $word =~ /\]/ ) { #if there was a chord insert it with chord color
+ $t -> insert ( "end", '[' . $words2[0] . ']', 'chord' );
+ }else{ #else insert the lyrics
+ $t -> insert ( "end", $words2[0] );
+ }
+ $t -> insert ( "end", $words2[1] );
+ }
+ }else{ #a lyrics line without comment, directive or chord
+ $t -> insert ( "end", $line );
+ } #if-elsif-else
+ if ( $line!~/^{/ ) { #if the line is not a directive
+ $t -> insert ( "end", "\n" ); #append newline character
+ }
+ } # foreach
+ } #if
+}
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_file_new
+#
+# asks user to save the currend document
+# shows dialog to choose template and opens template
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_file_new {
+ $info = "$name_menu_file $name_menu_new"; #status bar
+ ask_save(); #ask if user wants to save current document
+ $t->delete ("1.0", "end"); #delete current document
+ #define dialog box for choosing template
+ $dialog = $mw -> DialogBox ( -title => "$name_menu_new ...", -buttons => [ $name_ok ]);
+ $list = $dialog->add( "Listbox" )->pack();
+ $list -> insert ('end', @name_template );
+ $info = $dialog->Show; #show dialog box
+ $info = $list->curselection(); #get index number of selected template
+ open ( FILE, "templates/$name_template[$info]" ); #open template file
+ while ( <FILE> ){ $t->insert("end", $_) } #read template file into text variable
+ close (FILE); #close template file
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+ $t ->focus(); #give the cursor focus to the editor
+ $filename = ""; #reset file name
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_file_open
+#
+# asks user to save the currend document
+# shows dialog to choose file and opens file
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_file_open {
+ $info = "$name_menu_file $name_menu_open"; #status bar
+ ask_save(); #ask if user wants to save current document
+ $filename = $mw->getOpenFile ( -filetypes => #file dialog box
+ [
+ [$name_guitartex_files, ['.gtx']],
+ [$name_chordpro_files, ['.chopro','.pro']],
+ [$name_text_files, ['.txt', '.text']],
+ [$name_all_files, '*', ],
+ ],
+ -title => $name_menu_open );
+ $info = $filename; #status bar
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete old text
+ open ( FILE, "$filename" ); #open file
+ while ( <FILE> ){ $t->insert("end", $_) } #read file into text variable
+ close (FILE); #close file
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+ $t ->focus(); #give the cursor focus to the editor
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine ask_save
+#
+# asks user to save the currend document
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub ask_save{
+ if ( $filename eq "" ) { return } #do nothing if file name is not defined
+ $dialog = $mw->Dialog( #define dialog box
+ -buttons => [$name_yes,$name_no],
+ -title => $name_menu_save,
+ -text => $name_ask_save,
+ );
+ $info = $dialog -> Show; #show dialog box
+ if ( $info eq $name_yes ) { menu_file_save() } #if answer is 'yes' save current document
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_file_save
+#
+# save current document
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_file_save {
+ $info = "$name_menu_file $name_menu_save"; #status bar
+ if ( $filename ){ #if file name is defined, save document
+ open ( FILE, ">$filename" ) or die "cannot open file $filename\n";
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end");
+ chomp $text;
+ print FILE $text;
+ close (FILE);
+ $info = $filename;
+ }else{ #else show 'save as...' dialog box
+ menu_file_saveas();
+ }
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_file_saveas
+#
+# save current document with a new name
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_file_saveas {
+ $info = "$name_menu_file $name_menu_saveas"; #status bar
+ $filename = $mw->getSaveFile ( -filetypes => #define and show dialog box
+ [
+ [$name_guitartex_files, ['.gtx']],
+ [$name_chordpro_files, ['.chopro','.pro']],
+ [$name_text_files, ['.txt', '.text']],
+ [$name_all_files, '*', ],
+ ],
+ -title => $name_menu_saveas );
+ $info = $filename; #status bar
+ menu_file_save(); #save file with given name
+}
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_file_quit
+#
+# exit the program
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_file_quit {
+ ask_save(); #ask if user wants to save current document
+ exit; #quit
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine export_latex
+#
+# export the current document in LaTeX format
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub export_latex{
+ menu_file_save();
+ ($name, $dir, $ext) = fileparse ($filename, '\..*');
+ chdir $dir;
+ system ( "gtx2tex $name$ext" );
+ if ( $text_viewer ne "" ) {system ( "$text_viewer \"$name.tex\" &" )}
+ $info = $name_tex_ready;
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine export_postscript
+#
+# export the current document in postscript format
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub export_postscript{
+ menu_file_save();
+ ($name, $dir, $ext) = fileparse ($filename, '\..*');
+ chdir $dir;
+ system ( "gtx2tex --output=ps $name$ext" );
+ if ( $ps_viewer ne "" ) {system ( "$ps_viewer \"$name.ps\" &" )}
+ $info = $name_ps_ready;
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine export_pdf
+#
+# export the current document in pdf format
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub export_pdf{
+ menu_file_save();
+ ($name, $dir, $ext) = fileparse ($filename, '\..*');
+ chdir $dir;
+ system ( "gtx2tex --output=pdf $name$ext" );
+ if ( $pdf_viewer ne "" ) {system ( "$pdf_viewer \"$name.pdf\" &" )}
+ $info = $name_pdf_ready;
+}
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_edit_paste
+#
+# insert text from clipboard
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_edit_paste {
+ $info = $name_menu_paste1;
+ $text = $mw -> SelectionGet();
+ $t -> insert("insert", $text )
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_edit_insert
+#
+# insert text from a file
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_edit_insert {
+ $info = "$name_menu_edit $name_menu_insert"; #status bar
+ $insert_filename = $mw->getOpenFile ( -filetypes => #open file dialog
+ [
+ [$name_guitartex_files, ['.gtx']],
+ [$name_chordpro_files, ['.chopro','.pro']],
+ [$name_text_files, ['.txt', '.text']],
+ [$name_all_files, '*', ],
+ ],
+ -title => $name_menu_insert,
+ -initialdir => "/home/" );
+ $info = $insert_filename; #status bar
+ open ( FILE, "$insert_filename" ); #open chosen file
+ while ( <FILE> ){ $t->insert("insert", $_); } #insert chosen file
+ close (FILE); #close file
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine menu_editcrd2chopro
+#
+# convert lines from crd to chordpro format
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub menu_edit_crd2chopro {
+ $info = "$name_menu_edit $name_menu_crd"; #status bar
+ $chord = $t -> get ("insert linestart", "insert lineend" ); #save the current line in variable $chord
+ $t -> delete ( "insert linestart", "insert lineend + 1 char" ); #delete the current line
+ $lyric = $t -> get ("insert linestart", "insert lineend" ); #save the next line in variable $lyric
+ $t -> delete ( "insert linestart", "insert lineend" ); #delete the lyric line
+
+ if ( length($lyric) < length ($chord) ) { #adjust the length of chord and lyric
+ $lyric .= " " x ( length ($chord) - length ($lyric) +1 ); #line by adding spaces to the
+ $chord .= " "; #shorter line
+ }else{
+ $chord .= " " x ( length ($lyric) - length ($chord) +1 );
+ $lyric .= " ";
+ }
+
+ $chopro=""; #initialize variable for the resulting line
+ for ( $i=0; $i<length($lyric); $i++ ){ #look at each character in chord line
+ if ( substr ($chord, $i, 1) eq " " ){ #if it is a space character
+ $chopro .= substr ($lyric, $i, 1); #save the lyrics character beneath it in the chordpro line
+ }else{ #else
+ $chopro .= "["; #start chord symbol with '['
+ $chordlen = 0; #initialize length of the chord
+ while ( substr ($chord, $i+$chordlen, 1) ne " " ){ #while chord length
+ $chopro .= substr ($chord, $i+$chordlen, 1); #add chord
+ $chordlen++; #increment chord length
+ }
+ $chopro .= "]"; #finish chord symbol with ']'
+ for ( $j = 0; $j <= $chordlen; $j++ ){
+ $chopro .= substr ($lyric, $i+$j, 1); #fill in lyrics
+ }
+ $i = $i + $chordlen; #correct pointer
+ }
+ }
+ chop $chopro;
+ $t -> insert ("insert", $chopro); #insert new chordpro line
+ $t -> delete ("insert");
+ $t -> insert ("insert", "\n");
+
+}
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine calc_color
+#
+# convert the result of color dialog into LaTeX color format
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub calc_color{
+ $red = int(hex(substr($info,1,4))/655.35)/100;
+ $green = int(hex(substr($info,5,4))/655.35)/100;
+ $blue = int(hex(substr($info,9,4))/655.35)/100;
+ $info = "red $red, green $green, blue $blue";
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine color_chorus
+#
+# search the document for a chorus color directive
+# if it exists, change the chosen color value
+# if it doesn't exist, add a new chorus color directive with the chosen color value
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub colors_chorus{
+ $info = $mw -> chooseColor(-title=>$name_menu_colorchorus); #get a color value from dialog box
+ calc_color(); #convert color value into LaTeX format
+ if ( $t -> search ( "{color_chorus:", "1.0" ) ) { #if color directive already exists
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save the text in variable $text
+ $text =~ s/(\{color_chorus:)(.*)(\})/\1$red,$green,$blue\3/; #replace color directive with new value
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete old text
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ }else{ #else
+ $t -> insert ("end", "\n{color_chorus:$red,$green,$blue}"); #insert a new color directive
+ }
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutines color_bridge, color_tab ...
+#
+# the following subroutines work like the color_chorus subroutine
+# look there for comments
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub colors_bridge{
+ $info = $mw -> chooseColor(-title=>$name_menu_colorbridge);
+ calc_color();
+ if ( $t -> search ( "{color_bridge:", "1.0" ) ) {
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end");
+ $text =~ s/(\{color_bridge:)(.*)(\})/\1$red,$green,$blue\3/;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->delete("1.0","end");
+ $t->insert('end', $text);
+ }else{
+ $t -> insert ("end", "\n{color_bridge:$red,$green,$blue}");
+ }
+}
+
+sub colors_tab{
+ $info = $mw -> chooseColor(-title=>$name_menu_colortab);
+ calc_color();
+ if ( $t -> search ( "{color_tab:", "1.0" ) ) {
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end");
+ $text =~ s/(\{color_tab:)(.*)(\})/\1$red,$green,$blue\3/;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->delete("1.0","end");
+ $t->insert('end', $text);
+ }else{
+ $t -> insert ("end", "\n{color_tab:$red,$green,$blue}");
+ }
+}
+
+sub colors_instr{
+ $info = $mw -> chooseColor(-title=>$name_menu_colorinstr);
+ calc_color();
+ if ( $t -> search ( "{color_instr:", "1.0" ) ) {
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end");
+ $text =~ s/(\{color_instr:)(.*)(\})/\1$red,$green,$blue\3/;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->delete("1.0","end");
+ $t->insert('end', $text);
+ }else{
+ $t -> insert ("end", "\n{color_instr:$red,$green,$blue}");
+ }
+}
+
+sub colors_second{
+ $info = $mw -> chooseColor(-title=>$name_menu_second);
+ calc_color();
+ if ( $t -> search ( "{color_second:", "1.0" ) ) {
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end");
+ $text =~ s/(\{color_second:)(.*)(\})/\1$red,$green,$blue\3/;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->delete("1.0","end");
+ $t->insert('end', $text);
+ }else{
+ $t -> insert ("end", "\n{color_second:$red,$green,$blue}");
+ }
+}
+
+sub colors_second_back{
+ $info = $mw -> chooseColor(-title=>$name_menu_secondback);
+ calc_color();
+ if ( $t -> search ( "{color_second_back:", "1.0" ) ) {
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end");
+ $text =~ s/(\{color_second_back:)(.*)(\})/\1$red,$green,$blue\3/;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->delete("1.0","end");
+ $t->insert('end', $text);
+ }else{
+ $t -> insert ("end", "\n{color_second_back:$red,$green,$blue}");
+ }
+}
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine transpose_up
+#
+# transpose one half tone up
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub transpose_up{
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save text in variable $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text
+ #exchange chord names
+ $text =~ s/\[A#/[*B/g; $text =~ s/\[Ab/[*A/g; $text =~ s/\[A/[*A#/g; $text =~ s/\[Bb/[*B/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[(B|H)/[*C/g; $text =~ s/\[C#/[*D/g; $text =~ s/\[Cb/[*C/g; $text =~ s/\[C/[*C#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[D#/[*E/g; $text =~ s/\[Db/[*D/g; $text =~ s/\[D/[*D#/g; $text =~ s/\[E#/[*F#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[Eb/[*E/g; $text =~ s/\[E/[*F/g; $text =~ s/\[F#/[*G/g; $text =~ s/\[Fb/[*F/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[F/[*F#/g; $text =~ s/\[G#/[*A/g; $text =~ s/\[Gb/[*G/g; $text =~ s/\[G/[*G#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[\*/[/g; $text =~ s/\/A#/\/*B/g; $text =~ s/\/Ab/\/*A/g; $text =~ s/\/A/\/*A#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/Bb/\/*B/g; $text =~ s/\/(B|H)/\/*C/g; $text =~ s/\/C#/\/*D/g; $text =~ s/\/Cb/\/*C/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/C/\/*C#/g; $text =~ s/\/D#/\/*E/g; $text =~ s/\/Db/\/*D/g; $text =~ s/\/D/\/*D#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/E#/\/*F#/g; $text =~ s/\/Eb/\/*E/g; $text =~ s/\/E/\/*F/g; $text =~ s/\/F#/\/*G/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/Fb/\/*F/g; $text =~ s/\/F/\/*F#/g; $text =~ s/\/G#/\/*A/g; $text =~ s/\/Gb/\/*G/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/G/\/*G#/g; $text =~ s/\/\*/\//g;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine transpose_up
+#
+# transpose one half tone down
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub transpose_down{
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save text in variable $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text
+ #exchange chord names
+ $text =~ s/\[A#/[*A/g; $text =~ s/\[Ab/[*G/g; $text =~ s/\[A/[*G#/g; $text =~ s/\[Bb/[*A/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[(B|H)/[*A#/g; $text =~ s/\[C#/[*C/g; $text =~ s/\[Cb/[*A#/g; $text =~ s/\[C/[*B/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[D#/[*D/g; $text =~ s/\[Db/[*C/g; $text =~ s/\[D/[*C#/g; $text =~ s/\[E#/[*E/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[Eb/[*D/g; $text =~ s/\[E/[*D#/g; $text =~ s/\[F#/[*F/g; $text =~ s/\[Fb/[*D#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[F/[*E/g; $text =~ s/\[G#/[*G/g; $text =~ s/\[Gb/[*F/g; $text =~ s/\[G/[*F#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[\*/[/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/A#/\/*A/g; $text =~ s/\/Ab/\/*G/g; $text =~ s/\/A/\/*G#/g; $text =~ s/\/Bb/\/*A/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/(B|H)/\/*A#/g; $text =~ s/\/C#/\/*C/g; $text =~ s/\/Cb/\/*A#/g; $text =~ s/\/C/\/*B/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/D#/\/*D/g; $text =~ s/\/Db/\/*C/g; $text =~ s/\/D/\/*C#/g; $text =~ s/\/E#/\/*E/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/Eb/\/*D/g; $text =~ s/\/E/\/*D#/g; $text =~ s/\/F#/\/*F/g; $text =~ s/\/Fb/\/*D#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/F/\/*E/g; $text =~ s/\/G#/\/*G/g; $text =~ s/\/Gb/\/*F/g; $text =~ s/\/G/\/*F#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/\*/\//g;
+ chomp $text;
+
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine transpose_flat2sharp
+#
+# convert flat notes into sharp notes, e.g. Db -> C#
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub transpose_flat2sharp{
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save text in variable $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text
+ #exchange chord names
+ $text =~ s/\[Ab/[G#/g; $text =~ s/\[Bb/[A#/g; $text =~ s/\[Cb/[B/g; $text =~ s/\[Db/[C#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[Eb/[D#/g; $text =~ s/\[Fb/[E/g; $text =~ s/\[Gb/[F#/g; $text =~ s/\/Ab/\/G#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/Bb/\/A#/g; $text =~ s/\/Cb/\/B/g; $text =~ s/\/Db/\/C#/g; $text =~ s/\/Eb/\/D#/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/Fb/\/E/g; $text =~ s/\/Gb/\/F#/g;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine transpose_sharp2flat
+#
+# convert sharp notes into flat notes, e.g. D# -> Eb
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub transpose_sharp2flat{
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save text in variable $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text
+ #exchange chord names
+ $text =~ s/\[A#/[Bb/g; $text =~ s/\[(B#|H#)/[C/g; $text =~ s/\[C#/[Db/g; $text =~ s/\[D#/[Eb/g;
+ $text =~ s/\[E#/[F/g; $text =~ s/\[F#/[Gb/g; $text =~ s/\[G#/[Ab/g; $text =~ s/\/A#/\/Bb/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/(B#|H#)/\/C/g; $text =~ s/\/C#/\/Db/g; $text =~ s/\/D#/\/Eb/g; $text =~ s/\/E#/\/F/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/F#/\/Gb/g; $text =~ s/\/G#/\/Ab/g;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine transpose_b2h
+#
+# convert international notation B into german notation H
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub transpose_b2h{
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save text in variable $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text
+ #exchange chord names
+ $text =~ s/\[Bb/[*Bb/g; $text =~ s/\[B/[H/g; $text =~ s/\[\*/[/g;
+ $text =~ s/\/Bb/\/*Bb/g; $text =~ s/\/B/\/H/g; $text =~ s/\/\*/\//g;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine transpose_b2h
+#
+# convert german notation H into international notation B
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+sub transpose_h2b{
+ $text = $t->get("1.0", "end"); #save text in variable $text
+ $t->delete("1.0","end"); #delete text
+ #exchange chord names
+ $text =~ s/\[H/[B/g; $text =~ s/\/H/\/B/g;
+ chomp $text;
+ $t->insert('end', $text); #restore text from variable $text
+ highlight(); #do syntax highlighting
+}
+
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# subroutine about
+#
+# some information
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub about{
+ $mw -> messageBox ( -type => "OK", -title => $name_menu_help, -message => $message_about );
+}
+
+
--- /dev/null
+# Menus
+$name_menu_file = "Arquivo";
+$name_menu_new = "Novo";
+$name_menu_open = "Abrir...";
+$name_menu_save = "Salvar";
+$name_menu_saveas = "Salvar como...";
+$name_menu_export = "Exportar";
+$name_menu_latex = "LaTeX";
+$name_menu_postscript = "Postscript";
+$name_menu_pdf = "PDF";
+$name_menu_quit = "Sair";
+
+$name_menu_edit = "Editar";
+$name_menu_paste1 = "Colar do Clipboard";
+$name_menu_insert = "Inserir arquivo...";
+$name_menu_crd = "crd -> chopro";
+$name_menu_cut = "Recortar: use ctrl-x";
+$name_menu_copy = "Copiar: use ctrl-c";
+$name_menu_paste2 = "Colar: use ctrl-v";
+
+$name_menu_directives = "Diretivas";
+$name_menu_startchorus = "Iniciar Chorus";
+$name_menu_endchorus = "Terminar Chorus";
+$name_menu_startbridge = "Iniciar Bridge";
+$name_menu_endbridge = "Finalizar Bridge";
+$name_menu_starttab = "Iniciar Tablatura";
+$name_menu_endtab = "Finalizar Tablatura";
+$name_menu_startinstr = "Iniciar Instrumental";
+$name_menu_endinstr = "Finalizar Instrumental";
+$name_menu_guitartab = "GuitarTab";
+$name_menu_basstab = "BassTab";
+$name_menu_title = "Título";
+$name_menu_subtitle = "Subtítulo";
+$name_menu_newpage = "Nova Página";
+$name_menu_comment = "Comentário";
+#TRADUZIR 'Margin Par'
+$name_menu_margin = "Margem Parágrafo";
+$name_menu_second = "Segunda Voz";
+
+$name_menu_songbook = "Songbook";
+$name_menu_book = "Document class book";
+$name_menu_booktitle = "Book - título";
+$name_menu_bookauthor = "Book - autor";
+$name_menu_bookdate = "Book - data";
+$name_menu_chapter = "Capítulo";
+$name_menu_include = "Inclue";
+$name_menu_even = "Par";
+
+$name_menu_color = "Cores";
+$name_menu_colorchorus = "Chorus";
+$name_menu_colorbridge = "Bridge";
+$name_menu_colortab = "Tablatura";
+$name_menu_colorinstr = "Instrumental";
+$name_menu_second = "Segunda Voz";
+$name_menu_secondback = "Fundo segunda Voz";
+
+$name_menu_transpose = "Transpor";
+$name_menu_transup = "Acima";
+$name_menu_transdown = "Abaixo";
+$name_menu_transsharp = "b -> #";
+$name_menu_transflat = "# -> b";
+$name_menu_transgerman = "B -> H";
+$name_menu_transinternational = "H -> B";
+
+$name_menu_help = "Ajuda";
+$name_menu_about = "sobre";
+
+#Icons
+#TRADUZIR TUDO
+$name_icon_chords = "Acordes:";
+$name_icon_tab = "Tablatura:";
+$name_icon_guitar = "Guitar";
+$name_icon_bass = "Bass";
+$name_icon_fret = " Traste:";
+$name_icon_string = " Corda:";
+
+$name_note_B = "B";
+
+# File Dialogs
+$name_guitartex_files = "GuitarTeX";
+$name_chordpro_files = "ChordPro";
+$name_text_files = "Texto";
+$name_all_files = "Todos Arquivos";
+$name_ask_save = "Deseja salvar o\ndocumento atual ?";
+$name_tex_ready = "Arquivo TeX pronto";
+$name_ps_ready = "Arquivo Postscript pronto";
+$name_pdf_ready = "Arquivo PDF pronto";
+
+# Common
+$name_yes ="sim";
+$name_no = "não";
+$name_ok = "ok";
+$name_cancel = "cancela";
+
+$message_about = "Em caso de problemas\nleia doc.pdf :-)\nou contate o autor\nguitartex-users\@lists.sourceforge.net";
+
+# Tool Tips
+$balloon_new = "Iniciar novo documento";
+$balloon_open = "Abrir documento existente";
+$balloon_save = "Salvar documento atual";
+$balloon_latex = "Exportar arquivo LaTeX";
+$balloon_ps = "Exportar arquivo postscript";
+$balloon_pdf = "Exportar arquivo PDF";
+$balloon_transpose_up = "Transpor acima";
+$balloon_transpose_down = "Transpor abaixo";
+$balloon_highlight = "Sintaxe highlighting";
+$balloon_chord = "Inserir acorde";
+$balloon_guitartab = "Inserir guitar tablatura";
+$balloon_basstab = "Inserir bass tablatura";
+$balloon_fret = "Entre com número do traste\ne clique botão da corda\npara entrar com as notas da tablatura";
+
+# Templates
+@name_template = ("vazio", "Song", "Songbook");
--- /dev/null
+# Menus
+$name_menu_file = "Datei";
+$name_menu_new = "Neu";
+$name_menu_open = "Öffnen...";
+$name_menu_save = "Speichern";
+$name_menu_saveas = "Speichern als...";
+$name_menu_export = "Exportieren";
+$name_menu_latex = "LaTeX";
+$name_menu_postscript = "Postscript";
+$name_menu_pdf = "PDF";
+$name_menu_quit = "Beenden";
+
+$name_menu_edit = "Bearbeiten";
+$name_menu_paste1 = "Einfügen aus Zwischenablage";
+$name_menu_insert = "Datei einfügen...";
+$name_menu_crd = "crd -> chopro";
+$name_menu_cut = "Auschneiden: verwende strg-x";
+$name_menu_copy = "Kopieren: verwende strg-c";
+$name_menu_paste2 = "Einfügen: verwende strg-v";
+
+$name_menu_directives = "Direktiven";
+$name_menu_startchorus = "Anfang Refrain";
+$name_menu_endchorus = "Ende Refrain";
+$name_menu_startbridge = "Anfang Bridge";
+$name_menu_endbridge = "Ende Bridge";
+$name_menu_starttab = "Anfang Tabulatur";
+$name_menu_endtab = "Ende Tabulatur";
+$name_menu_startinstr = "Anfang Instrumental";
+$name_menu_endinstr = "Ende Instrumental";
+$name_menu_guitartab = "GuitarTab";
+$name_menu_basstab = "BassTab";
+$name_menu_title = "Titel";
+$name_menu_subtitle = "Untertitel";
+$name_menu_newpage = "Neue Seite";
+$name_menu_comment = "Kommentar";
+$name_menu_margin = "Randbemerkung";
+$name_menu_second = "Zweite Stimme";
+
+$name_menu_songbook = "Liederbuch";
+$name_menu_book = "Dokumentklasse Buch";
+$name_menu_booktitle = "Buchtitel";
+$name_menu_bookauthor = "Buchautor";
+$name_menu_bookdate = "Buchdatum";
+$name_menu_chapter = "Kapitel";
+$name_menu_include = "Einfügen";
+$name_menu_even = "Gerade Seite";
+
+$name_menu_color = "Farben";
+$name_menu_colorchorus = "Refrain";
+$name_menu_colorbridge = "Bridge";
+$name_menu_colortab = "Tabulatur";
+$name_menu_colorinstr = "Instrumental";
+$name_menu_second = "Zweite Stimme";
+$name_menu_secondback = "Hintergrund zweite Stimme";
+
+$name_menu_transpose = "Transponieren";
+$name_menu_transup = "Hoch";
+$name_menu_transdown = "Runter";
+$name_menu_transsharp = "b -> #";
+$name_menu_transflat = "# -> b";
+$name_menu_transgerman = "B -> H";
+$name_menu_transinternational = "H -> B";
+
+$name_menu_help = "Hilfe";
+$name_menu_about = "über";
+
+#Icons
+$name_icon_chords = "Akkorde:";
+$name_icon_tab = "Tabulatur:";
+$name_icon_guitar = "Gitarre";
+$name_icon_bass = "Bass";
+$name_icon_fret = " Bund:";
+$name_icon_string = " Saite:";
+
+$name_note_B = "H";
+
+# Datei-Dialoge
+$name_guitartex_files = "GuitarTeX";
+$name_chordpro_files = "ChordPro";
+$name_text_files = "Text";
+$name_all_files = "Alle Dateien";
+$name_ask_save = "Wollen Sie das aktuelle\nDokument speichern?";
+$name_tex_ready = "TeX-Datei fertig";
+$name_ps_ready = "Postscript-Datei fertig";
+$name_pdf_ready = "PDF-Datei fertig";
+
+# Allgemein
+$name_yes ="ja";
+$name_no = "nein";
+$name_ok = "ok";
+$name_cancel = "cancel";
+
+$message_about = "Bei Problemen\nsiehe doc.pdf :-)\noder schreiben Sie an\nguitartex-users\@lists.sourceforge.net";
+
+# Tool Tips
+$balloon_new = "Neues Dokument beginnen";
+$balloon_open = "Vorhandenes Dokument öffnen";
+$balloon_save = "Aktuelles Dokument speichern";
+$balloon_latex = "Als LaTeX-Datei exportieren";
+$balloon_ps = "Als Postscript-Datei exportieren";
+$balloon_pdf = "Als PDF-Datei exportieren";
+$balloon_transpose_up = "hoch transponieren";
+$balloon_transpose_down = "runter transponieren";
+$balloon_highlight = "Syntax highlighting";
+$balloon_chord = "Akkord einfügen";
+$balloon_guitartab = "Tabulatur für Gitarre einfügen";
+$balloon_basstab = "Tabulatur für Bass einfügen";
+$balloon_fret = "Um Tabulatur-Noten einzugeben,\nNummer des Bundes eingeben\nund auf den Button für die Saite klicken";
+
+# Templates
+@name_template = ("empty", "Song", "Songbook");
--- /dev/null
+# Menus
+$name_menu_file = "File";
+$name_menu_new = "New";
+$name_menu_open = "Open...";
+$name_menu_save = "Save";
+$name_menu_saveas = "Save as...";
+$name_menu_export = "Export";
+$name_menu_latex = "LaTeX";
+$name_menu_postscript = "Postscript";
+$name_menu_pdf = "PDF";
+$name_menu_quit = "Quit";
+
+$name_menu_edit = "Edit";
+$name_menu_paste1 = "Paste from Clipboard";
+$name_menu_insert = "Insert file...";
+$name_menu_crd = "crd -> chopro";
+$name_menu_cut = "Cut: use ctrl-x";
+$name_menu_copy = "Copy: use ctrl-c";
+$name_menu_paste2 = "Paste: use ctrl-v";
+
+$name_menu_directives = "Directives";
+$name_menu_startchorus = "Start Chorus";
+$name_menu_endchorus = "End Chorus";
+$name_menu_startbridge = "Start Bridge";
+$name_menu_endbridge = "End Bridge";
+$name_menu_starttab = "Start Tablature";
+$name_menu_endtab = "End Tablature";
+$name_menu_startinstr = "Start Instrumental";
+$name_menu_endinstr = "End Instrumental";
+$name_menu_guitartab = "GuitarTab";
+$name_menu_basstab = "BassTab";
+$name_menu_title = "Title";
+$name_menu_subtitle = "Subtitle";
+$name_menu_newpage = "New Page";
+$name_menu_comment = "Comment";
+$name_menu_margin = "Margin Par";
+$name_menu_second = "Second Voice";
+
+$name_menu_songbook = "Songbook";
+$name_menu_book = "Document class book";
+$name_menu_booktitle = "Book title";
+$name_menu_bookauthor = "Book author";
+$name_menu_bookdate = "Book date";
+$name_menu_chapter = "Chapter";
+$name_menu_include = "Include";
+$name_menu_even = "Even";
+
+$name_menu_color = "Colors";
+$name_menu_colorchorus = "Chorus";
+$name_menu_colorbridge = "Bridge";
+$name_menu_colortab = "Tablature";
+$name_menu_colorinstr = "Instrumental";
+$name_menu_second = "Second Voice";
+$name_menu_secondback = "Background second Voice";
+
+$name_menu_transpose = "Transpose";
+$name_menu_transup = "Up";
+$name_menu_transdown = "Down";
+$name_menu_transsharp = "b -> #";
+$name_menu_transflat = "# -> b";
+$name_menu_transgerman = "B -> H";
+$name_menu_transinternational = "H -> B";
+
+$name_menu_help = "Help";
+$name_menu_about = "about";
+
+#Icons
+$name_icon_chords = "Chords:";
+$name_icon_tab = "Tablature:";
+$name_icon_guitar = "Guitar";
+$name_icon_bass = "Bass";
+$name_icon_fret = " Fret:";
+$name_icon_string = " String:";
+
+$name_note_B = "B";
+
+# File Dialogs
+$name_guitartex_files = "GuitarTeX";
+$name_chordpro_files = "ChordPro";
+$name_text_files = "Text";
+$name_all_files = "All Files";
+$name_ask_save = "Do you want to save\nthe current document?";
+$name_tex_ready = "TeX file ready";
+$name_ps_ready = "Postscript file ready";
+$name_pdf_ready = "PDF file ready";
+
+# Common
+$name_yes ="yes";
+$name_no = "no";
+$name_ok = "ok";
+$name_cancel = "cancel";
+
+$message_about = "In case of problems\nsee doc.pdf :-)\nor contact the author at\nguitartex-users\@lists.sourceforge.net";
+
+# Tool Tips
+$balloon_new = "Start a new document";
+$balloon_open = "Open an existing document";
+$balloon_save = "Save the current document";
+$balloon_latex = "Export LaTeX file";
+$balloon_ps = "Export postscript file";
+$balloon_pdf = "Export PDF file";
+$balloon_transpose_up = "Transpose up";
+$balloon_transpose_down = "Transpose down";
+$balloon_highlight = "Syntax highlighting";
+$balloon_chord = "Insert chord";
+$balloon_guitartab = "Insert guitar tablature";
+$balloon_basstab = "Insert bass tablature";
+$balloon_fret = "Enter fret number\nand click on string button\nto enter tablature notes";
+
+# Templates
+@name_template = ("empty", "Song", "Songbook");
--- /dev/null
+# Menus
+$name_menu_file = "Archivo";
+$name_menu_new = "Nuevo";
+$name_menu_open = "Abrir...";
+$name_menu_save = "Guardar";
+$name_menu_saveas = "Guardar como...";
+$name_menu_export = "Exportar";
+$name_menu_latex = "LaTeX";
+$name_menu_postscript = "Postscript";
+$name_menu_pdf = "PDF";
+$name_menu_quit = "Salir";
+
+$name_menu_edit = "Modificar";
+$name_menu_paste1 = "Pegar desde Clipboard";
+$name_menu_insert = "Introducir archivo...";
+$name_menu_crd = "crd -> chordpro";
+$name_menu_cut = "Cortar: usa ctrl-x";
+$name_menu_copy = "Copiar: usa ctrl-c";
+$name_menu_paste2 = "Pegar: usa ctrl-v";
+
+$name_menu_directives = "Directivas";
+$name_menu_startchorus = "Inicio Coro";
+$name_menu_endchorus = "Fin Coro";
+$name_menu_startbridge = "Inicio Bridge";
+$name_menu_endbridge = "Fin Bridge";
+$name_menu_starttab = "Inicio Tabulado";
+$name_menu_endtab = "Fin Tabulado";
+$name_menu_startinstr = "Inicio Instrumental";
+$name_menu_endinstr = "Fin Instrumental";
+$name_menu_guitartab = "Tabulado para Guitarra";
+$name_menu_basstab = "Tabulado para Bajo";
+$name_menu_title = "Título";
+$name_menu_subtitle = "Subtítulo";
+$name_menu_newpage = "Nueva Página";
+$name_menu_comment = "Comentario";
+$name_menu_margin = "Parrafo a Margen";
+$name_menu_second = "Segunda Voz";
+
+$name_menu_songbook = "Songbook";
+$name_menu_book = "Document class book";
+$name_menu_booktitle = "Título";
+$name_menu_bookauthor = "Autor";
+$name_menu_bookdate = "Fecha";
+$name_menu_chapter = "Capítulo";
+$name_menu_include = "Incluir archivo";
+$name_menu_even = "Par";
+
+$name_menu_color = "Colores";
+$name_menu_colorchorus = "Acorde";
+$name_menu_colorbridge = "Puente";
+$name_menu_colortab = "Tabulado";
+$name_menu_colorinstr = "Instrumental";
+$name_menu_second = "Segunda Voz";
+$name_menu_secondback = "Segunda voz en segundo plano";
+
+$name_menu_transpose = "Transporta";
+$name_menu_transup = "Arriba";
+$name_menu_transdown = "Abajo";
+$name_menu_transsharp = "b -> #";
+$name_menu_transflat = "# -> b";
+$name_menu_transgerman = "B -> H";
+$name_menu_transinternational = "H -> B";
+
+$name_menu_help = "Ayuda";
+$name_menu_about = "Acerca de ";
+
+#Icons
+$name_icon_chords = "Acordes:";
+$name_icon_tab = "Tabulado:";
+$name_icon_guitar = "Guitarra";
+$name_icon_bass = "Bajo";
+$name_icon_fret = " Traste:";
+$name_icon_string = " Cuerda:";
+
+$name_note_B = "B";
+
+# File Dialogs
+$name_guitartex_files = "GuitarTeX";
+$name_chordpro_files = "ChordPro";
+$name_text_files = "Text";
+$name_all_files = "Todos los archivos";
+$name_ask_save = "¿Desea guardar el\narchivo actual?";
+$name_tex_ready = "Archivo TeX listo";
+$name_ps_ready = "Archivo Postscript listo";
+$name_pdf_ready = "Archivo PDF listo";
+
+# Common
+$name_yes ="sì";
+$name_no = "no";
+$name_ok = "ok";
+$name_cancel = "cancelar";
+
+$message_about = "En caso de problemas\nlea doc.pdf :-)\no contacte con el autor en\nguitartex-users\@lists.sourceforge.net";
+
+# Tool Tips
+$balloon_new = "Crear un documento nuevo";
+$balloon_open = "Abrir un documento existente";
+$balloon_save = "Guardar el documento actual";
+$balloon_latex = "Exportar a LaTeX";
+$balloon_ps = "Exportar a postscript";
+$balloon_pdf = "Exportar a PDF";
+$balloon_transpose_up = "Transportar arriba";
+$balloon_transpose_down = "Transportar abajo";
+$balloon_highlight = "Coloreado de Sintaxis";
+$balloon_chord = "Introducir acorde";
+$balloon_guitartab = "Introducir tabulado de guitarra";
+$balloon_basstab = "Introducir tabulado de bajo";
+$balloon_fret = "Introduzca el número del traste\ny haga click en el botón de cuerda\npara introducir notas en el tabulado";
+
+# Templates
+@name_template = ("empty", "Song", "Songbook");
+
--- /dev/null
+# Menus
+$name_menu_file = "File";
+$name_menu_new = "Nuovo";
+$name_menu_open = "Apri...";
+$name_menu_save = "Salva";
+$name_menu_saveas = "Salva con nome...";
+$name_menu_export = "Esporta";
+$name_menu_latex = "LaTeX";
+$name_menu_postscript = "Postscript";
+$name_menu_pdf = "PDF";
+$name_menu_quit = "Esci";
+
+$name_menu_edit = "Modifica";
+$name_menu_paste1 = "Incolla dagli Appunti";
+$name_menu_insert = "Inserisci file...";
+$name_menu_crd = "crd -> chopro";
+$name_menu_cut = "Taglia: usa ctrl-x";
+$name_menu_copy = "Copia: usa ctrl-c";
+$name_menu_paste2 = "Incolla: usa ctrl-v";
+
+$name_menu_directives = "Direttive";
+$name_menu_startchorus = "Inizio Ritornello";
+$name_menu_endchorus = "Fine Ritornello";
+$name_menu_startbridge = "Inizio Bridge";
+$name_menu_endbridge = "Fine Bridge";
+$name_menu_starttab = "Inizio Tablatura";
+$name_menu_endtab = "Fine Tablatura";
+$name_menu_startinstr = "Inizio Strumentale";
+$name_menu_endinstr = "Fine Strumentale";
+$name_menu_guitartab = "Tablatura per Chitarra";
+$name_menu_basstab = "Tablatura per Basso";
+$name_menu_title = "Titolo";
+$name_menu_subtitle = "Sottotitolo";
+$name_menu_newpage = "Nuova Pagina";
+$name_menu_comment = "Commento";
+$name_menu_margin = "Paragrafo a Margine";
+$name_menu_second = "Seconda Voce";
+
+$name_menu_songbook = "Canzoniere";
+$name_menu_book = "Document class book";
+$name_menu_booktitle = "Titolo";
+$name_menu_bookauthor = "Autore";
+$name_menu_bookdate = "Data";
+$name_menu_chapter = "Capitolo";
+$name_menu_include = "Includi file";
+$name_menu_even = "Pagina Pari";
+
+$name_menu_color = "Colori";
+$name_menu_colorchorus = "Ritornello";
+$name_menu_colorbridge = "Bridge";
+$name_menu_colortab = "Tablatura";
+$name_menu_colorinstr = "Strumentale";
+$name_menu_second = "Seconda Voce";
+$name_menu_secondback = "Seconda Voce in Sottofondo";
+
+$name_menu_transpose = "Tonalità";
+$name_menu_transup = "Alza";
+$name_menu_transdown = "Abbassa";
+$name_menu_transsharp = "b -> #";
+$name_menu_transflat = "# -> b";
+$name_menu_transgerman = "B -> H";
+$name_menu_transinternational = "H -> B";
+
+$name_menu_help = "Aiuto";
+$name_menu_about = "Informazioni su ";
+
+#Icons
+$name_icon_chords = "Accordi:";
+$name_icon_tab = "Tablatura:";
+$name_icon_guitar = "Chitarra";
+$name_icon_bass = "Basso";
+$name_icon_fret = " Tasto:";
+$name_icon_string = " Corda:";
+
+$name_note_B = "Si";
+
+# File Dialogs
+$name_guitartex_files = "GuitarTeX";
+$name_chordpro_files = "ChordPro";
+$name_text_files = "Text";
+$name_all_files = "Tutti i File";
+$name_ask_save = "Vuoi salvare il\ndocumento corrente?";
+$name_tex_ready = "File TeX pronto";
+$name_ps_ready = "File Postscript pronto";
+$name_pdf_ready = "File PDF pronto";
+
+# Common
+$name_yes ="Sì";
+$name_no = "No";
+$name_ok = "Ok";
+$name_cancel = "Cancella";
+
+$message_about = "In caso di problemi\nleggi doc.pdf :-)\noppure contatta l'autore\na jmiltz\@web.de";
+
+# Tool Tips
+$balloon_new = "Inizia un nuovo documento";
+$balloon_open = "Apri un documento esistente";
+$balloon_save = "Salva in documento corrente";
+$balloon_latex = "Esporta come file LaTeX";
+$balloon_ps = "Esporta come file postscript";
+$balloon_pdf = "Esporta come file PDF";
+$balloon_transpose_up = "Alza Tonalità";
+$balloon_transpose_down = "Abbassa Tonalità";
+$balloon_highlight = "Sintassi evidenziata";
+$balloon_chord = "Inserisci accordo";
+$balloon_guitartab = "Inserisci tablatura per chitarra";
+$balloon_basstab = "Inserisci tablatura per basso";
+$balloon_fret = "Inserisci il numero di tasto\ne premi sulla corda\nper inserire le note\nsulla tablatura";
+
+# Templates
+@name_template = ("Vuoto", "Canzone", "Canzoniere");
+
--- /dev/null
+# Menus
+$name_menu_file = "Plik";
+$name_menu_new = "Nowy";
+$name_menu_open = "Otwórz...";
+$name_menu_save = "Zapisz";
+$name_menu_saveas = "Zapisz jako...";
+$name_menu_export = "Eksportuj";
+$name_menu_latex = "LaTeX";
+$name_menu_postscript = "Postscript";
+$name_menu_pdf = "PDF";
+$name_menu_quit = "Wyj¶cie";
+
+$name_menu_edit = "Edycja";
+$name_menu_paste1 = "Wklej ze schowka";
+$name_menu_insert = "Wstaw plik...";
+$name_menu_crd = "crd -> chopro";
+$name_menu_cut = "Wytnij: u¿yj ctrl-x";
+$name_menu_copy = "Kopiuj: u¿yj ctrl-c";
+$name_menu_paste2 = "Wklej: u¿yj ctrl-v";
+
+$name_menu_directives = "Dyrektywy";
+$name_menu_startchorus = "Pocz±tek chóru";
+$name_menu_endchorus = "Koniec chóru";
+$name_menu_startbridge = "Pocz±tek mostu";
+$name_menu_endbridge = "Koniec mostu";
+$name_menu_starttab = "Pocz±tek tabulatury";
+$name_menu_endtab = "Koniec tabulatury";
+$name_menu_startinstr = "Pocz±tek czê¶ci instrumentalnej";
+$name_menu_endinstr = "Koniec czê¶ci instrumentalnej";
+$name_menu_guitartab = "Tabulatura gitarowa";
+$name_menu_basstab = "Tabulatura basowa";
+$name_menu_title = "Tytu³";
+$name_menu_subtitle = "Podtytu³";
+$name_menu_newpage = "Nowa strona";
+$name_menu_comment = "Komentarz";
+$name_menu_margin = "Marginesy";
+$name_menu_second = "Drugi g³os";
+
+$name_menu_songbook = "¦pierwnik";
+$name_menu_book = "Document class book";
+$name_menu_booktitle = "Tytu³ ¶piewnika";
+$name_menu_bookauthor = "Autor ¶piewnika";
+$name_menu_bookdate = "Data ¶piewnika";
+$name_menu_chapter = "Rozdzia³";
+$name_menu_include = "Do³±cz";
+$name_menu_even = "Parzyste";
+
+$name_menu_color = "Kolory";
+$name_menu_colorchorus = "Chór";
+$name_menu_colorbridge = "Most";
+$name_menu_colortab = "Tabulatura";
+$name_menu_colorinstr = "Czê¶æ instrumentalna";
+$name_menu_second = "Drugi g³os";
+$name_menu_secondback = "Drugi g³os w tle";
+
+$name_menu_transpose = "Transponowanie";
+$name_menu_transup = "Do góry";
+$name_menu_transdown = "Do do³u";
+$name_menu_transsharp = "b -> #";
+$name_menu_transflat = "# -> b";
+$name_menu_transgerman = "B -> H";
+$name_menu_transinternational = "H -> B";
+
+$name_menu_help = "Pomoc";
+$name_menu_about = "O programie";
+
+#Icons
+$name_icon_chords = "Akordy:";
+$name_icon_tab = "Tabulatury:";
+$name_icon_guitar = "Gitara";
+$name_icon_bass = "Bas";
+$name_icon_fret = " Próg:";
+$name_icon_string = " Struna:";
+
+$name_note_B = "B";
+
+# File Dialogs
+$name_guitartex_files = "GuitarTeX";
+$name_chordpro_files = "ChordPro";
+$name_text_files = "Tekst";
+$name_all_files = "Wszystkie pliki";
+$name_ask_save = "Czy chcesz zapisaæ\nbie¿±cy dokument?";
+$name_tex_ready = "Plik TeX gotowy";
+$name_ps_ready = "Plik Postscript gotowy";
+$name_pdf_ready = "Plik PDF gotowy";
+
+# Common
+$name_yes ="tak";
+$name_no = "nie";
+$name_ok = "ok";
+$name_cancel = "zrezygnuj";
+
+$message_about = "W przypadku problemów\nzagl±dnij do doc.pdf :-)\nlub skontaktuj siê z autorem\nguitartex-users\@lists.sourceforge.net";
+
+# Tool Tips
+$balloon_new = "Utwórz nowy dokument";
+$balloon_open = "Otwórz istniej±cy dokument";
+$balloon_save = "Zapisz bierz±cy dokument";
+$balloon_latex = "Eksportuj do pliku LaTeX";
+$balloon_ps = "Eksportuj do pliku postscript";
+$balloon_pdf = "Eksportuj do pliku PDF";
+$balloon_transpose_up = "Transponuj do góry";
+$balloon_transpose_down = "Transponuj do do³u";
+$balloon_highlight = "Pod¶wietlanie sk³adni";
+$balloon_chord = "Wstaw akord";
+$balloon_guitartab = "Wstaw tabulaturê gitarow±";
+$balloon_basstab = "Wstaw tabulaturê basow±";
+$balloon_fret = "Wprowad¼ numer progu\ni naci¶nij na przycisku odpowiedniej struny\naby wprowadziæ tabulaturê";
+
+# Templates
+@name_template = ("empty", "Song", "Songbook");
--- /dev/null
+new in GuitarTeX 2.8.2
+
+Chord output can be changed to Italian notation by command line option --italian
+
+Support for Spanish language
+
--- /dev/null
+# Created with template: single_song
--- /dev/null
+# Created with template: songbook
--- /dev/null
+# Created with template: empty
projects / musique / hvguitartex.git / commitdiff
